Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Revision:
02 from
22.1.2007
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 1 /692
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 2 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CAUTION
Installing, commissioning and operating of this product may be performed by thorough trained and
specialised personnel *
only. We explicitly will not take any responsibility for any damage on our products caused by
improper installation, configuration and handling. Internal modifications must solely be carried out by
specialised personnel authorised by
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH
*
Definition: Specialised personnel, when authorised and properly instructed, may perform
following tasks:
Installing, mounting, commissioning and operating of the apparatus and the system
when familiar with.
Maintenance and use of safety equipment according to standard rules and regulations.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 3 /692
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 4 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 22
1.1 Contents of This Document ............................................................................................. 22
1.2 General Terms Definition................................................................................................. 22
1.3 Measuring Method........................................................................................................... 24
1.4 General Influencing Quantities and Tolerances: .............................................................. 24
4MD...
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 5 /692
DRS
4.1 OVERVIEW......................................................................................................................72
4.2 TECHNICAL DATA ..........................................................................................................73
4.2.1 Generator Differential 2-phase 2-winding....................................................................73
4.2.2 Generator Differential 3-phase 2-winding....................................................................74
4.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................76
4.3.1 MD222 ........................................................................................................................76
4.3.2 MD322, MD323...........................................................................................................77
4.4 LOGIC DIAGRAMS ..........................................................................................................78
4.4.1 MD222 ........................................................................................................................78
4.4.2 MD322 and MD323.....................................................................................................82
4.5 FUNCTION.......................................................................................................................88
4.6 COMMISSIONING ...........................................................................................................90
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 7 /692
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 9 /692
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 11 /692
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 13 /692
DRS
19.5.5 MT318....................................................................................................................560
19.6 COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................561
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 15 /692
DRS
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 17 /692
DRS
COPYRIGHT, REMARKS
This document is the sole property of ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH and may neither be copied nor
distributed and used without our written consent. Law according to DIN 34 Standard will prosecute
violations.
The data contained in this literature should be considered as product information only. We would like
to advise that short term modifications of our production range are possible due to our aim to
continuously improve the performance of our products for the benefit of our customers so there may
be differences between the products supplied and the corresponding descriptive literature.
According to our experience following the instructions outlined in this document will provide the most
satisfactory service performance.
In case of unusual troubles, which cannot be resolved by referring to this literature, please contact
our nearest agent or our Head Office.
When commissioning, the operating instructions and also the applicable Local Safety Standards
have strictly to be observed.
This edition of the document has been carefully checked regarding up-to-date contents and
correctness. Should there be any discrepancies or contradictory information in this descriptive
literature, could you please inform us. In case of problems please do not try to solve them on your
own but contact our nearest agency or our Head Office, which will be glad to be of any assistance to
you.
All agreements, legal rights, obligations, performance and scope of supply for ANDRITZ HYDRO
GmbH and also conditions, governing the warranty, are without expectation, regulated according to
the Contract Agreement and are not, in any way, influenced by the contents of the descriptive
literature or operating instructions.
Urgent information will be conveyed by telephone or fax.
Our address:
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH
Dept. AT-PRT
Wienerbergstrae 41D
A-1120 VIENNA
AUSTRIA
DID-001-1.02
Page 18 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 19 /692
DRS
To
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH
Dept. AT-PRT / attn. Mr. Hantsch
Wienerbergstrae 41D
A-1120 VIENNA
Please inform us at your earliest convenience if you have any additional requests and
suggestions or in case of errors.
We thank you for your co-operation.
Remarks:
From:
Address:
Phone:
Fax:
E-mail
DID-001-1.02
Page 20 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 21 /692
DRS
1.1
GENERAL
The document contains the description of the characteristic features and parameter settings of all
the available protective functions of the Digital Relay System" from now on referred to as DRS. The
feasible operating characteristics, setting ranges, input matrices, connections- and logic diagrams as
well as the necessary completing information is outlined for each protective function. For User
information during relay configuration an extensive Help Feature is included into the DRS operating
system.
1.2
DID-001-1.02
Page 22 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Blocking Input:
Digital input enabling blocking of the respective protective function, respectively
function Stage.
Outputs:
Initiation:
Trip:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 23 /692
DRS
1.3
Measuring Method
All protective DRS functions which are applying the power system frequency signals to evaluate the
parameters are using the Fourier-Transformation.
Thereby the CT/VT signals after potential isolation and filtering are sampled 12 times each cycle and
subsequently processed according to the formulas of the mentioned algorithm as per Fig. 1-1. The
results of the computations are then at disposal for further processing of the signal vector value, i.e.
amplitude and phase angle, for the basic harmonic.
t=
T
12
s(t + t)
T = 20ms
t = 1,6ms
s(t)
Sampling frequency ft = 600Hz
s(t)
t
Fig. 1-1
Due to physical- and measuring principle reasons the above outlined method is not applicable for all
functions. For power measuring functions, i.e. overload, power direction, etc. a more complex digital
signal computation is applied which is described in detail in the specific chapters.
1.4
< 0,5%
0,5%/10K
1%
10 ms
Further information to the measuring accuracy is outlined in the specific function descriptions.
DID-001-1.02
Page 24 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 25 /692
DRS
2.1
OVERVIEW
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
LOGIC FUNCTIONS
... DRS-COMPACT2
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function Number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function Type (short denomination of the protective function)
... ANSI Device Number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MB . . .
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
Application
1099
MB111
94
C2,M,L
1096
MB141
94
C2,M,L
1098
MB142
94
C2,M,L
1078
MB211
94
C2
1036
MB311
94
C2,M,L
Logic function 2
1094
MB442
94
C2,M
Logic function 2
2028
MB442
94
0 - 180 sec.
Signal function 4: 4 Signal functions, time delay range:
0 - 2 sec.
Signal function 4: 4 Signal functions, time delay range:
0 - 180 sec.
DID-001-1.02
Page 26 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
2.2
TECHNICAL DATA
2.2.1
Signal Functions
FNNR
1099
TYPE
MB111
ANSI
94
Application
C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Input signal processing of an external digital input for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
adjustable time delay.
MB111
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal)
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Parameter Settings
Time delay range: 0 ... 180 s in steps of 0,05 s
Active slope: rising/falling
Response Time
Operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 27 /692
DRS
FNNR
1096
TYPE
MB141
ANSI
94
Application
C2,M,L
0 - 2 sec.
Input signal processing of 4 external digital inputs for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
independent adjustable time delay for each stage.
MB141
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal) stage 1
Binary input (digital signal) stage 2
Binary input (digital signal) stage 3
Binary input (digital signal) stage 4
Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Blocking input stage 4
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 4
Trip stage 4
Parameter Settings
Time delay range stage 1:
Active slope stage 1:
Time delay range stage 2:
Active slope stage 2:
Time delay range stage 3:
Active slope stage 3:
Time delay range stage 4:
Active slope stage 4:
0 ... 2 s in 0,01 s
rising/falling
0 ... 2 s in 0,01 s
rising/falling
0 ... 2 s in 0,01 s
rising/falling
0 ... 2 s in 0,01 s
rising/falling
steps
steps
steps
steps
Response Time
Operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Page 28 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR
1098
TYPE
MB142
ANSI
94
Application
C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Input signal processing of 4 external digital inputs for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
independent adjustable time delay for each stage.
MB142
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal) stage 1
Binary input (digital signal) stage 2
Binary input (digital signal) stage 3
Binary input (digital signal) stage 4
Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Blocking input stage 4
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 4
Trip stage 4
Parameter Settings
Time delay range stage 1:
Active slope stage 1:
Time delay range stage 2:
Active slope stage 2:
Time delay range stage 3:
Active slope stage 3:
Time delay range stage 4:
Active slope stage 4:
steps
steps
steps
steps
Response Time
Operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 29 /692
DRS
2.2.2
FNNR
1078
TYPE
MB211
ANSI
94
Application
C2
Trip circuit supervision of the CB TRIP circuit and the CB auxiliary circuit (2 digital inputs) with a
setting selection for the internal logic evaluation.
MB211
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: TRIP circuit (trip circuit supervision)
Auxiliary circuit (trip circuit supervision)
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Trip circuit faulty
Parameter Settings
Time delay range:
TRIP circuit healthy (normal operation):
Auxiliary circuit healthy (normal operation):
Logic connection (result=1 ... alarm):
Response Time
Minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Page 30 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
2.2.3
FNNR TYPE
1036
MB311
ANSI
94
Application
C2,M,L
Out of step conditions are recognised by the number of pole slips within a set measuring time
period.
Note: The pole slip pulses are provided by another protective function, e.g. field failure protection.
MB311
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Auxiliary input system 1
Auxiliary input system 2
Auxiliary input system 3
Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Parameter Settings
Pole slipping number: 1 ... 25
Measuring time: 0 ... 180 s in 5 s steps
Response Time
Minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 31 /692
DRS
2.2.4
Logic Function 2
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
Logic function 2
1094
MB442
94
C2,M
Logik function 2
2028
MB442
94
Logic connections of digital signals with inverted output and with configurable time delay.
MB442
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Selection of:
IN01 ... IN32
inv. IN01 ... inv. IN32
OUT01 ... OUT32
inv. OUT01 ... inv. OUT32
Outputs
Binary: Logic function
Parameter Settings
Adjustable time delay: 0 ... 999 s in 0,01 s steps
Logic output: normal/ inverted
Response Time
minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)
DID-001-1.02
Page 32 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
DRSDRSI 6 COMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I5
I9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKB
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 07
OUT 09
OPTIONAL MODULE
OUT 06
I8
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 03
I3
29
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 2
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MODBUS
2.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
RS422/485
2.3
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 33 /692
DRS
MB211
+ -
TRIP CIRCUIT
X1
PROTECTION
SYSTEM TRIP
CONTACT
VE1
TRIP CIRCUIT
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
CIRCIUT BREAKER
TRIP COIL
- (BATT.)
1
BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
PLEASE NOTE:
VAR. 1A: (NOM. VOLTAGE OF BIN. INPUTS) = (BATT. VOLTAGE)
VAR. 1B: (NOM. VOLTAGE OF BIN. INPUTS) = (BATT. VOLTAGE) / 2
REMARK: DESIGN VERSION 1A WITH EXTENDED
RANGE INPUT-VERSION ONLY (VN 2x VN).
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
IN 02
OUT 17
OUT 18
123
OUT 19
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 07
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
AUX. CIRCUIT
OUT 06
OUT 09
OPTIONAL MODULE
VE2
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VAR. 1A123
VAR. 1B
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
29
OUT 03
I3
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
+ (BATT.)
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
2.3.1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 34 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
TRIP CIRCUIT
X1
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
TRIP CONTACT
UE1
TRIP CIRCUIT
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
- (BATT.)
1
BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
PLEASE NOTE:
NOM. VOLTAGE OF DIGITAL INPUT = BATT. VOLTAGE
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
1 2
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKB
CIRCIUT BREAKER
TRIP COIL
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
UE2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 03
I3
29
TRIP COIL
AUX. CONTACT
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
+ (BATT.)
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 35 /692
DRS
MB442
+ X1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I9
BINARY INPUT 4
Optional
BINARY INPUT 5
BINARY INPUT 6
BINARY INPUT 7
BINARY INPUT 8
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
IN 02
OUT 17
OUT 18
123
OUT 19
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
BINARY INPUT 3
OUT 07
OUT 09
UAKB
BINARY INPUT 2
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
BINARY INPUT 1
OUT 03
I3
29
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
2.3.2
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
2.4
2.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
MB111/ MB141/ MB142
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
62 Alarm
62 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 37 /692
DRS
NOTEBOOK
B.INP.
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
BL.
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
ALARM ST.1
B.INP.
ST.2
BL.
ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TRIP
ST.1
&
&
ALARM ST.2
B.INP.
ST.3
1
BL.
ST.3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TRIP
ST.2
&
&
ALARM ST.3
BL.
ST.4
ALARM ST.3
LEDMATRIX
TRIP ST.3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TRIP
ST.3
&
&
ALARM ST.4
&
&
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
TRIP
ST.4
&
ALARM ST.4
TRIP ST.4
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP ST.3
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.2
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
ALARM ST.2
TRIP ST.2
B.INP.
ST.4
TRIP ST.1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
ALARM ST.1
TRIP ST.1
1
0
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIPMATRIX
TRIP ST.4
PROCESSING
MB111 SIGNAL FUNCTION 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
MB141 SIGNAL FUNCTION 4 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
MB142 SIGNAL FUNCTION 4 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 2-6
DID-001-1.02
Page 38 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
always
0"
LED-indications of PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.1
>
<
Set Value
(BINARY INPUT):
BIN. I/0
PRESET
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 39 /692
DRS
MB211
TRIP CIRCUIT
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
TRIP CONTACT
UE1
TRIP COIL
AUX. CONTACT
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
UE2
CIRCIUT BREAKER
TRIP COIL
TRIP 7
CIRCUIT
AUX.
E1
E2
CIRCUIT
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
- (BATT.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 40 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
TRIP CIRCUIT
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
TRIP CONTACT
TRIP COIL
AUX. CONTACT
PROCESSING
UE1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
UE2
CIRCIUT BREAKER
TRIP COIL
TRIP
E1
0"
CIRCUIT
7
BLOCKING
- (BATT.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 41 /692
DRS
NOTEBOOK
E1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
CIRCUIT
1
0
E2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
AUX.
CIRCUIT
1
0
E1
&
E2
&
set = 0
AND
E1 E2 A
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
E1
E2
E1
0
0
1
1
acc.
set
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
NOT EX-OR
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NAND
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
A
EX-OR
E1 E2 A
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
NOR
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
A
0
1
1
1
acc.
set
LEDDISPLAY
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
FUNCTION
A
&
t>
TRIP CIRCUIT
FAULTY
OUTPUT
&
1
0
1
NOTE:
A = 1 ... TRIP CIRCUIT READY
A = 0 ... TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY
NOTE:
LEDS AND OUTPUTS ACTIVE IN
CASE OF TRIP CIRCUIT-FAULT.
TRIP CIRCUIT
FAULTY
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
3
DID-001-1.02
Page 42 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
E1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
CIRCUIT
1
0
set = 0
BIN. I/0
PRESET
E1
&
AUX.
CIRCUIT
1
0
set = 0
&
1"
E2
01
no signal
connected
default
= 0
AND
E1 E2 A
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
E1
E2
LEDDISPLAY
BLOCKING
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
t>
TRIP CIRCUIT
FAULTY
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
1
NOTE:
A = 1 ... TRIP CIRCUIT READY
A = 0 ... TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY
TRIP CIRCUIT
FAULTY
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
3
DESIGN-VERSION 2 IS
SUITABLE FOR NON-EXTENDED
RANGE INPUTS TOO.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 43 /692
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MB211
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
&
set = 0
AND
E1 E2 A
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
E1
E2
acc.
set
OR
E1 E2
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
A
0
1
1
1
NAND
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
NOR
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
NOT EX-OR
E1 E2 A
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
EX-OR
E1 E2 A
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
acc.
set
LOGICAL LINK:
Specifies the condition of E1, E2 in order to
get a TRIP CIRCUIT READY decision
(A = 1).
Note: applies for EXTENDED RANGE
INPUTS only!
Programmable
software-matrix
for the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
DID-001-1.02
Page 44 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
SYSTEM TRIP
CONTACT
UE1
SIMPLIFIED DESIGN:
CB INTERNAL
CONTACT
UE2
CIRCIUT
BREAKER
OFF COIL
- (BATT.)
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN EXAMPLE / NOT USING AUX. CIRCUIT
DESIGN VERSION: 2 page 1/2
Fig. 2-13
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 45 /692
DRS
DESIGN EXAMPLE:
+ (BATT.)
I = 3mADC max.
VINPUT
DRS PROTECTION
DIGITAL INPUT/
Vnom = 220VDC
RANGE:
VR
VCOIL
- (BATT.)
given
In case the relay does not drop off because of the 3mADC-test-current a loading resistor should
be added in parallel to the coil in order to lessen the voltage drop at the coil.
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN EXAMPLE/ NOT USING AUX. CIRCUIT
DESIGN VERSION: 2 page 2/2
Fig. 2-14
DID-001-1.02
Page 46 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DESIGN-VERSION 1: 1
EXAMPLE: NORMAL OPERATING SEQUENCE (TRIP CIRCUIT HEALTHY)
GEN. IN OPERATION
CB = STILL ON
PROTECTION ISSUES TRIP!
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
UE1= 1
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
UE2= 0
CB
OFF COIL
E1
0
0
1
1
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
A
0
1
1
1
UE1= 0
UE2= 0
CB
OFF COIL
GEN. TRIPPED
CB = OFF
PROTECTION STILL ISSUES TRIP
- (BATT.)
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
UE1= 0
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
UE2= 1
E1
0
0
1
1
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
1
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
UE1= 1
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
UE2= 1
E1
0
0
1
1
CB
OFF COIL
RESULT: A = 1
- (BATT.)
A
0
1
1
1
GEN. TRIPPED
CB = OFF
PROTECTION ALREADY RESET
+ (BATT.)
CB
OFF COIL
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
RESULT: A = 0
RESULT: A = 1
- (BATT.)
E1
0
0
1
1
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
1
RESULT: A = 1
- (BATT.)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 47 /692
DRS
DESIGN-VERSION 1: 1
EXAMPLE: TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY
WIRE BROKEN:
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
WIRE BROKEN
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
+ (BATT.)
UE1= 0
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
U = UBATT.(= FAULT!)
E1
0
0
1
1
UE2= 0
CB
OFF COIL
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
UE1= 0
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
A
0
1
1
1
UE2= 0
CB
OFF COIL
OFF-COIL
INTERRUPTED
RESULT: A = 0
TRIP CIRC. = FAULT
- (BATT.)
E1
0
0
1
1
- (BATT.)
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
1
RESULT: A = 0
TRIP CIRC. = FAULT
BATT. = OFF
BATT. = 0V
PROTECTION
TRIP CONTACT
CB
INTERNAL
CONTACT
UE1= 0
E1
0
0
1
1
UE2= 0
CB
OFF COIL
OR
E2
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
1
RESULT: A = 0
BATT. = 0V
DID-001-1.02
Page 48 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DESIGN-VERSION 1:
EXAMPLE: HOW TO CHOOSE THE INPUT VOLTAGE FOR DESIGN VERSION 1
INPUTS (see Fig. 2-2)
THE DRS-COMPACT2A HAS 4 NOM. INPUT VOLTAGE RANGES WICH CAN BE CHOOSEN BY JUMPERS FOR
EVERY INPUT SEPARATLY
FOR DESIGN VERSION 1 THE JUMPERS FOR THE TWO REFERING INPUTS SHOULD BE SET TO:
VAR. 1A:
BATT. VOLTAGE
220 VDC
110 VDC
60 VDC
48 VDC
110 VDC
60 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
BATT. VOLTAGE
220 VDC
110 VDC
60 VDC
48 VDC
24 VDC
220 VDC
110 VDC
60 VDC
48 VDC
24 VDC
(77V...300 VDC)
(42V...300 VDC)
(17V...300 VDC)
(17V...300 VDC)
VAR. 1B:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 49 /692
DRS
2.4.2
MB442
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
BINARY INPUT 5
BINARY INPUT 6
BINARY INPUT 7
BINARY INPUT 8
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
OPTIONAL
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 50 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
BINARY
INPUTS
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
HARDWARE INPUTS
Software
input
1...32
FEEDBACK
CIRCUIT
2
IN1
max. 32 SIGNALS
IN8
IN9
&
IN32
BIN. I/0
PRESET
32
OUT1
OUT32
INPUT- 32
FEEDBACK
MATRIX
IN1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
9
SOFT-INPUTS ONLY
&
OUT32
1
=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
32
t>
INVERT
?
&
&
LEDDISPLAY
OUTPUT OF
LOGICFUNCTION 2
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
TRIPMATRIX
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
1
2
Software output
1...32
FEEDBACK CIRCUIT max. 32 SIGNALS
PROCESSING
SETTING VIA SOFTWARE / SEE DRS WIN LOGIC FUNCTION 2" RELAY PARAMETERS
NOTE: DELAYTIME APPLICABLE FOR (0" 1") ONLY.
INPUTS: HARDWARE INPUTS OR SOFTWARE INPUTS (VIA FEADBACK CIRCUIT)
NOTE: FEEDBACK CIRCUITS IF USED OVERWRITES THE HARDWARE - INPUTS! VALID FOR 0" AND 1"
PRIORITY FOR STATUS OF INPUTS: 1. SIMULATION VIA NOTEBOOK (BINARY I/O PRESET)
2. FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
3. HARDWARE INPUT
RECOMMENDED: IN ORDER TO FIND OUT THE VALID STATUS OF AN INPUT CHECK BINARY I/O - TABLE (USING NOTBOOCK);
CAUTION: THE INDICATION MAY BE TOO SLOW IN CASE OF A FAST FLIP - FLOP - ACTION!
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 51 /692
DRS
DETAIL:
AND-GATE
OVERVIEW
&
&
=1
&
&
DETAIL
IN1
available
HARDWARE
INPUTS
(or SOFT-INPUTS) 1
IN2
IN8
IN9
1
SOFT-INPUTS
only
IN32
&
OUT32
OUT1...32
may be used as
inputs for LOGIC
FUNCTION 2
OUT32
LEGEND:
1
DID-001-1.02
Page 52 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MB441
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
always
0"
LED-indications of PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.1
>
<
Set Value
(BINARY INPUT):
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 53 /692
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
AND - GATE:
AND - Connection of all activated digital signals:
(IN)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
&
OR - GATE:
t>
INVERT
?
) only!
FEEDBACK CIRCUITS
for IN and OUT
resp.
DID-001-1.02
Page 54 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
LOGIC:
DRS
FUNCTION OUPUT =
(IN1 & invOUT22).OR.(IN2 & invOUT22).OR.(not used).OR.(not used)
Note 1: The FUNCTION OUTPUT-signal is feed back to IN10. The FUNCTION OUTPUT is not inverted (normal)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 55 /692
DRS
LOGIC:
FUNCTION OUPUT =
(IN3 & IN4).OR.(invIN3 & invIN4).OR.(not used).OR.(not used)
Note 1: The FUNCTION OUTPUT-signal is feed back to IN24. The FUNCTION OUTPUT is not inverted (normal)
Note 2: These Settings are used for supervision of the aux. contacts of a CB (DBI...Dont Believe It)
Note 2: IN3 = CB open - contact
Note 2: IN4 = CB closed - contact
Note 2: In case of both contacts are 1 or boths contacts are 0
DBI...dont believe the contacts!
DID-001-1.02
Page 56 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
2.5
2.5.1
DRS
FUNCTION
MB111/ MB141/ MB142
Signal functions are provided to evaluate binary signals from the protected plant for alarm and/or trip
conditions in the DRS, as for example the initiation of an internal transformer fault, e.g. Buchholz,
oil- or winding over temperature, pressure relieve valve, cooler failure, etc.
The binary input signal is supervised according to the selected active signal slope (positive slope =
transition from logic 0 to logic 1, inverted slope = transition from logic 1 to logic 0) during each
sample and after a contact bounce delay of 4 samples the output initiation is started. When the
initiating condition is maintained during the whole set time delay a corresponding trip signal will be
produced.
Signal function 1 and signal function 4 differ only in the number of input signals to be processed.
Signal function 4 is especially used when several signals from a specific plant part are to be
evaluated, e.g. transformer mechanical protection which may be combined into a protective group.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 57 /692
DRS
2.5.2
MB211
The digital trip circuit supervision function MB211 has a similar operating characteristic as the
analogue hardware solution.
The function is provided with two digital inputs:
- Trip circuit healthy
- Auxiliary circuit healthy
The digital Trip Circuit Healthy corresponding parameter settings are configured whether during
normal system conditions the state of the trip circuit is sent to the digital input of the PROCESSING
as either
0 or 1. The same applies for the auxiliary circuit healthy conditions.
In our example we assume that:
Both Healthy settings are logic 1.
A logic AND configuration therefore means that both digital inputs (trip circuit healthy + auxiliary
circuit healthy) have to be 1 to affirm that the trip circuit is recognised to be in order.
If not, an alarm annunciation Trip Circuit Failure is being initiated.
In a normal state, i.e. trip circuit healthy, no output will be set from the DRS protection system and
no LED indication is shown. This corresponds to our User Operating Philosophy that no yellow or
red LED indication is present when everything is in order.
The time delay is provided in order to not initiate a false alarm during CB operation but to produce
an alarm output for a real trip circuit fault.
Examples for the setting value "logical connection" under the presupposition that the Healthy
configuration is set to "1":
EX-OR:
One of the two inputs has to be "1" and the other one must be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
OR:
One or both inputs have to be "1" for a trip circuit OK.
NOR:
Both inputs must be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
AND:
Both inputs must be "1" for a trip circuit OK.
NAND:
At least one of the two inputs have to be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
Important Note:
The only possibility to use the whole range of the possible logical configuration is as follows:
Battery: 220 VDC
Inputs: 110 VDC (set jumper to 110VDC).
Note: The 110VDC rated inputs can also be used permanently with 220 VDC.
DID-001-1.02
Page 58 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
2.5.3
DRS
MB442
Logic Scheme:
This logic function consists of 4 AND Gates which are conveyed to a common OR Gate. In the
Setting Value Window of the DRSWIN these 4 AND Gates are clearly visible and there are 4 large
blocks of input parameters, i.e. 1 to 4 for these 4 AND Gates. For following OR Connection after the
AND Gate no setting values are required and simply the output signals of the 4 AND Gates are
assigned to the respective outputs.
This way, each of the 4 function inputs of the OR Gate represents thereby an AND Connection of all
these inputs or outputs assigned by the Selection Mask as per setting value window. Please note
that the polarity for each selected input or output (AND Gates) can be inverted. Therefore when an
inverted input or output is to be used also the Inverting Mask has to be marked and as an important
NOTE: For an inverted input 2 confirmation selection marks are required, i.e. in the Selection Mask
as well as in the Inverting Mask.
It is not sufficient just to mark the Inverting Mask!
The inputs of the logic functions by themselves are either "Real" inputs, e.g. IN03 or "Real" outputs,
e.g. OUT01 which then can be suitably connected into the logic function.
To further describe the logic functions outputs:
The output of a logic function 2 can be configured and routed to a virtual input as well as to a real
input or inputs or to a virtual output as well as real output or outputs. This way it is possible to
transfer the state of the logic function 2 to an input of the DRS COMPACT2 software programme.
This is necessary because, for example, the blocking inputs for protective functions only accept
binary inputs (BI).
Time Module:
The result of the OR logic is time delayed according to the setting value and this delay is only active
during a transition from 1 0 on the input of the time delay module; please also refer to the
corresponding logic diagram and afterwards when thus set either directly or inverted activating the
function output. Please note that this time delay is not operative in case of a change from 0 1 at
the input of the time module and the input to the time delay module has always to be observed
according to the logic diagram. Should the time delay module be activated during an inverted slope
condition then the desired result may be implemented by an additional, double inversion, i.e. before
and after the delay module.
Example: By a suitable selection of the parameter setting value Inversion by the input signals as
well as by the output signals of the logic function 2 it is possible to obtain configurable operating
and/or reset time delays
Output:
The output of the logic function which is a single digital signal without initiation annunciation but a
trip can be allocated to the respective LED- and trip matrix and can be assigned to the general
distribution to the LED- and trip matrices. In addition these signals can be assigned to the backcoupling mask and returned to the binary inputs.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 59 /692
DRS
2.6
COMMISSIONING
Note: During all Commissioning Activities the Relevant
Safety Precautions Have to Be Strictly Observed!
2.6.1
Connections:
The external connections to the binary input signals are realised via adapted coupling modules
according to plant requirements and then transferred to the Central Control Unit VE.
The coupling modules may either be relay modules or opto-isolator modules. The selectable input
voltage can have a rating between 24VDC to 220VDC whereby the 220VDC opto- isolator inputs
can be energised continuously with up to 300VDC.
- Pre-Commissioning:
The DRS WIN User program enables the operation (simulation) of all digital inputs and outputs
(please also refer to: System / Binary In- and Output Selection) which can be carried out either
ONLINE or
OFFLINE and have preference over the real plant signals.
Thus it is possible to test all the complete logic functions OFFLINE.
- Commissioning Tests:
These tests can basically be limited to only verify the correct external input- and output signals for
the protection relay since the internal functions were already confirmed during the precommissioning tests.
- Input signals of the protective function:
The initiated external plant inputs are displayed in the Window "System"/ "Binary In/Output
Selection".
- Output signals of the protective function:
By operating (simulating) the outputs in the Window "System"/ "Binary In/Output Selection"
to verify the external circuitry, e.g. CB trip circuit, etc.
DID-001-1.02
Page 60 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 61 /692
DRS
3.1
OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
FNNR TYPE
CB Failure Protection
Note: Available from PROCESSING Firmware Version
5.24 on
1115
MC316
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Page 62 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
3.2
TECHNICAL DATA
FNNR TYPE
CB Failure Protection
1115
ANSI
MC316
Application
40
C2,M
MC316
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: CB closed position (from CB auxiliary contacts)
CBF start (CB failure start)
LOW GAS PRESSURE (CB not ready)
Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: CB failure stage 1 trip
CB failure stage 2 trip
CB failure stage 3 trip
Setting Parameters
Current interlock CBF
CBF feeder TRIP time delay
CBF bus section TRIP time delay
Maximum CBF STARTING time
Measuring
Reset Ratio: 0,97
Operating Time: 2 Periods
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 63 /692
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LOW GAS
TEST STAGE1 (opt.)
TEST STAGE2 (opt.)
BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.)
BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.)
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
UAKB
CBF START
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
CB is ON
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CB
OUT 03
I3
29
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 64 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
I L3
CB
AUX CONT.
CB ON
CB is ON
CBF START
LOW GAS
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
LEGEND
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 65 /692
DRS
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
1
1
CB is ON
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
&
CBF START
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
LOW GAS
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t3>set
>=1
1
0
&
&
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t1>
TRIP
PULSE
EXTENSION=
400ms
TRIP ST.1
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
LEDMATRIX
BLOCK. ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
2
4
&
t2 >
set
t2 = 0
TRIP
PULSE
EXTENSION=
400ms
&
1
0
PROCESSING
LEGEND
1 see drawing ZERO CROSSING
2 if LOW GAS t2 is automatically set to 0s
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.2
TRIPMATRIX
LEGEND
3 CBF Start faulty means: CBS is ON too long!
4 t1...t > CBF trip feeder
t2...t > CBF trip zone
t3...CBF start supervision
DID-001-1.02
Page 66 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MC316
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
TRIPMATRIX
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
not valid:
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
..
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
IL1
Usually the CBF START (dig. input) should be ON for short time
only (less than t3). If t3 is exceeded
ALARM!
Check input CBF START (= TRIP-command)
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 67 /692
DRS
EXPLANANTION OF CONDITION
ZERO CROSSING
MEANING OF:
IL1 > set
& (ZERO CROSSING)
ZERO CROSSING
ICBS
no ZERO CROSSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 68 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
3.5
3.5.1
DRS
FUNCTION
MC316
Digital Inputs:
CB closed position (condition: CB is closed)
CBF start (condition: CB failure start = trip command is initiated)
LOW GAS PRESSURE (CB is possibly not ready / can possibly not be tripped)
2x BLK
2x TST
Analogue Inputs:
Current Phase L1
Current Phase L2
Current Phase L3
Digital Outputs:
Stage 1: After expiry of time delay t1.
Stage 2: After expiry of time delay t2.
Note: In case of LOW GAS PRESSURE then the time delay t2 is automatically set
to 0 sec. and stage 2 is operating first.
Stage 3: After expiry of time delay t3.
Logic for Stage 1 / Stage2:
CBF start & CB closed position .... time delays t1 and t2 are beginning to start.
Or:
CBF start & one of the three phase currents are exceeding the set value ....
time delays t1 and t2 are beginning to start.
Features:
1.
When set to "LOW GAS PRESSURE" (binary input), then the program will automatically set the
delay t2 to 0 sec., i.e. the stage 2 trip is initiated immediately because of a possible CB not ready
condition and the higher level trip command is given first.
2.
When the time delay t3 has expired it means that the CBF start signal is initiated for an excessive
time which can indicate that either the stage 1 and stage 2 tripping were not successful or that the
CBF start signals are faulty or not being previously reset.
3.
After CB trip there may be some current oscillations which however have no zero crossings even
though the 1st harmonic is still above the configured setting value and in this case the CB failure
protective function will be blocked, i.e. no trip output.
4.
TRIP signal extension:
The tripping commands from stage 1 and stage 2 are being extended by 400 ms (in addition but not
overall) in order to prevent fleeting trip signals to the CB trip coil.
Stage 3 is not provided with a trip time extension but only will initiate an alarm annunciation meaning
a fault condition of the CBF function for internal or external causes.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 69 /692
DRS
3.6
COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
3.6.1
MC316
-Pre-Commissioning
With a relay test set the test current is injected and the binary inputs set with the aid of a terminal or
notebook Binary In/Output Pre-Selection are displayed and controlled on-screen.
Note: If real trip outputs to the external plant have to be prevented this can be achieved by opening
the disconnecting terminals or by temporary re-programming and/or blocking of the function outputs
(please refer to the "Function Outputs ..." in the logic diagram).
-Commissioning Tests
During the commissioning tests the Actual Measured Values" displayed and are verifying the
correct measurement of the input currents and the binary inputs are checked by operation of the
external auxiliary contacts of the protected plant.
The trip circuits have to be checked via the "Binary In/Outputs Selection" by actual tripping of the
corresponding plant equipment when set to "1" of the relevant switchgear parts thereby saving the
result of the tests into the event recording feature.
DID-001-1.02
Page 70 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 71 /692
DRS
4.1
MD...
GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL
OVERVIEW
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MD . . .
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
Application
1018
MD222
87G
C2,M,L
1014
MD322
87G
C2,M,L
1113
MD323
87G
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Page 72 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
4.2
TECHNICAL DATA
4.2.1
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MD . . .
FNNR TYPE
1018
ANSI
MD222
Application
87G
C2,M,L
MD222
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current system 1 phase L1
Current system 1 phase L2
Current system 2 phase L1
Current system 2 phase L2
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,05 ... 2.5 A in 0,01 A steps
Bias slope: 30 ... 60 % in 5 % steps
in A
in A
in A
in A
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 73 /692
DRS
4.2.2
FNNR TYPE
1014
MD322
ANSI
Application
87G
C2,M,L
FNNR TYPE
1113
MD323
ANSI
Application
87G
C2,M,L
3- phase generator differential protection, with stabilizing characteristic against outside faults with
lower bias.
DID-001-1.02
Page 74 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Inputs
Analogue: Current system 1 phase L1
Current system 1 phase L2
Current system 1 phase L3
Current system 2 phase L1
Current system 2 phase L2
Current system 2 phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,05 ... 2.5 xIn in 0,01 xIn steps
Bias slope: 30 ... 60 % in 5 % steps
in A
in A
in A
in A
in A
in A
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0,97
Operating time: 30 ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
26 ms at 60 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 75 /692
DRS
MD222
R
L1
+ -
T
L3
X1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
MAIN
TRANSF.
SYSTEM1
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I SYSTEM2 L3
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE
SYSTEM2
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
I SYSTEM2 L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
2~
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
GEN.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
4.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
4.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 76 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
C
L3
+ X1
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
G
3~
I SYSTEM2 L1
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
future use (hardware extension)
IEC870 5-103 control system interface
chain line data interface
control system interface
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I SYSTEM2 L3
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I2
29
I SYSTEM2 L2
SYSTEM2
I1
UAKB
GEN.
I SYSTEM1 L1
1A
5A
OPTIONAL MODULE
SYSTEM1
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
A
L1
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
4.3.2
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 77 /692
DRS
4.4
4.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
MD222
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
T
L3
PROCESSING
R
L1
MAIN
TRANSF.
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
GEN.
G
2~
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L3
TRIP
COMMANDS
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
BLOCKING
ALARM
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
Trip
Diff.Curr.
Block.
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 78 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L1
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L3
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L1
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L3
NOTEBOOK
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
I SYSTEM2 L1
FFT 1H
PROCESSING
FFT 1H
I SYSTEM2 L3
BASIC SET VALUE
OPERATE VALUE
BIAS
Result: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP
>=1
&
&
TRIP
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 79 /692
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
OUTPUT
1
0
FFT 1H
BIAS
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
The 1. Harmonic of the actual measured differential current is compared with the
actual operate value derived from the BIAS-diagram.
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-indications of PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
DID-001-1.02
Page 80 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
BIAS-Characteristic Differential-Protection
DRS PROCESSING
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE
ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
6,0
Set Value
BIAS
5,0
OPERATE REGION
4,0
S
BIA
BASIC SET
VALUE
OPERATE
VALUE
3,0
Set Diff
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
2,0
1,0
1,0
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
S
BIA
SLOPE ACC.
TO SET VALUE
BIAS
=6
0%
0%
=5
S
BIA
0%
=4
=
BIAS
30%
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0,3)
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
Note: The result of this diagram is the ACTUAL SET VALUE (valid for VE2 only!)
which is used to make the TRIP-decision:
|FFT 1H ( )|
DIFF. TRIP
L3
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 81 /692
DRS
4.4.2
B
L2
C
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
SYSTEM1
I SYSTEM1 L3
GEN.
G
3~
I SYSTEM2 L1
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L2
I SYSTEM2 L3
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Trip
Diff.Curr.
Block.
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 82 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE A
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE B
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE C
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE A
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE B
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE C
NOTEBOOK
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
FFT 1H
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L3
I SYSTEM2 L1
FFT 1H
I SYSTEM2 L2
I SYSTEM2 L3
BIAS
Result: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
LEDDISPLAY
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP
>=1
&
&
TRIP
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 83 /692
DRS
FFT 1H=
RESTRAINT
CURRENT
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
I SYSTEM1 L3
FFT 1H
P
Bias
R
O
C
E
S
S
I
N
G
I SYSTEM2 L3
1 4
1
Operate Value
0,30 A
DIFF.
PROT.
TRIP
45 %
BIAS
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
CALCULATION
OF DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
Result: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE
RESTR. CURR.
L1
L2
L3
LEGEND
1
2
3
4
DID-001-1.02
Page 84 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
FFT 1H
BIAS
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
The 1. Harmonic of the actual measured differential current is compared with the
actual operate value derived from the BIAS-diagram.
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-indications of PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 85 /692
DRS
BIAS-Characteristic Differential-Protection
DRS PROCESSING
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE
ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
6,0
Set Value
BIAS
5,0
OPERATE REGION
4,0
3,0
2,0
1,0
BASIC SET
VALUE
OPERATE
VALUE
Set Diff
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
1,0
0%
=6
S
BIA
S=
BIA
SLOPE ACC.
TO SET VALUE
BIAS
B IA
S=
BIAS
%
50
40%
%
= 30
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0,3)
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: FFT 1H of
ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3
Note: The result of this diagram is the ACTUAL SET VALUE (valid for
PROCESSING (VE2) only!) which is used to make the TRIP-decision:
1
|FFT 1H (DIFF)|
|((FFT 1H) of DIFF)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
L2
L3
DID-001-1.02
Page 86 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
C
L3
IL3
SYSTEM1
I SYSTEM1 L1
IL1
IL3
I SYSTEM1 L2
IL2
I SYSTEM1 L3
IL1
IL2
IL3
G
3~
GEN.
I SYSTEM2 L1
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L2
IL1
IL3
I SYSTEM2 L3
IL2
IL1
SYSTEM2
IL2
IL3
IL3
IL2
+ -
IL2
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
13
15
16
18
19
20
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I1
I2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
DC
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL1
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
A
L1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
13
LEGEND:
OUT 15
14
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
OUTFAULT
16
OPERATION (NO
CONDITION OF GEN.).
THEREFORE THIS (FAULT)
RECORD WAS NO INITIATED BY
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD322.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
CURRENT POLARITY ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING
DIAGRAM FOR MD322, MD323!
OUT 09
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 87 /692
DRS
4.5
FUNCTION
Differential protective functions are provided as a selective unit protection system against winding
short circuits. The measuring principle is based on the current vector differential computation within
the protected zone of the relevant sets of CTs.
Measuring Principle:
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times per cycle. By means of the FourierAnalysis
(DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for 1st harmonic (nominal frequency) are
computed and transferred to the CPU.
The CPU evaluates for each sample instant the differential signals for each phase and checks
whether the actual setting value has been exceeded (please also refer to the BIAS characteristic
graph). If during 11 consecutive samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a trip signal
will be initiated.
By this the trip operating time consists of following single time values:
a)
Fourier-Coefficient of the differential signal reaches and exceeds the actual setting value:
Duration: 1 ... 12 ms, depending on the size of the differential signal, respectively the ratio to the
setting value.
b)
Safety time: 11 consecutive samples = 0.9 cycles.
c)
Output relay: Approximately 5 ms
d)
The sum of times is typically smaller than 30 ms.
Bias Current / Stabilising:
The bias currents are phase-wise computed from the 1st harmonic currents of systems 1 of the
differential protection.
The trip conditions per phase are indicated in detail in the respective logic diagrams.
The trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive samples (3 cycles) the initiating conditions
are no longer fulfilled (tripping time extension).
Caution: Two Bias characteristics are available:
Fig. 4-13: Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD222, MD322
Fig. 4-14: Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current: MD323
DID-001-1.02
Page 88 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
6,0
BIAS - Characteristic
Generator-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD222, MD322
5,0
BIAS=60%
TRIP
BIAS=50%
4,0
BIAS=40%
BIAS=30%
Set
Diff
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
3,0
2,0
1,0
N O TRIP
0,0
0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
Standard BIASCharacteristic:
6,0
BIAS - Characteristic
Generator-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD323
5,0
BIAS=60%
4,0
BIAS=50%
TRIP
Set
Diff
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
3,0
2,0
1,0
BIAS=40%
BIAS=30%
N O TRIP
0,0
0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 89 /692
DRS
4.6
COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value and
the bias slope set according to requirements.
Also the relay outputs have to be set for the LED matrix and the TRIP matrix according to plant
requirements.
The function checks are preferably performed with the primary protected plant being out of service.
To check the function with a relay test set, e. g. the CT inputs for system 1 phase L1 the test current
is injected and raised up to the operation of the relay thereby observing the operating value with
respect to the operating characteristic.
The injected test current is now reduced and the reset value of the function recorded.
Please note that the external injected current values can be displayed and compared with the
internal measured values, i.e. phase and differential currents, in the User operating program
display Window.
The same is to be carried out for the other two phases of system 1 and the measured values
recorded.
To check the through fault stability of phase 1 system 1 short out relay terminals 2 and 8 and inject
at least the rated current between terminals 1 and 7 (please also refer to the relevant connection
diagram) and the protective function must neither be operating nor showing a differential current in
the internal measured values display of more than 5% In.
The same test should be carried out on the second phase whereby the analogous terminal numbers
shown on the connection diagram are applicable.
The trip- and alarm signals and the LED indications should be confirmed according to the relay
configuration and the connection diagrams.
Measuring with twice the differential current setting injection and the resulting operating time of the
protective function should to be carried out for each phase either via a timer or the "Recorded
Curves" in the User program to record the measured values.
A test of the configured function blocking input should be done in conjunction with a continuously
initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal can be verified without any
external initiation.
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
DID-001-1.02
Page 90 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to
the plant setting values according to the plant requirements.
After the tests any temporary setting changes should be restored to the original parameter settings.
Commissioning Tests:
During commissioning the function of the protection scheme is tested during normal service
conditions.
If possible following tests under operating conditions are recommended:
- Short Circuit Test for an Internal Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases inside the protected
zone.
Block protection trips.
Connect measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or display the actual measured values
window in the User program.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation of the
differential protection. Record the operating values.
Restore the protection trips.
Shut down the generator if possible via a protection trip and remove the short circuit.
- Short Circuit Test for a Through Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases outside the protected
zone so that the two sets of CTs can be provided with the test current flow.
Block protection trips.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation up to nominal current.
Thereby the differential protection has to be stable. Select the display of the actual measured
values window in the User program and record these values.
Restore the protection trips.
Shut down the generator if possible via a protection trip and remove the short circuit.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 91 /692
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 92 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
5.1
DRS
OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MD . . .
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective restraint;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective restraint;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective restraint;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
2-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective restraint;
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1033
MD221
87T
C2,M,L
1119
MD224
87T
C2,M
1124
MD225
87T
C2,M,L
1034
MD231
87T
C2,M
1120
MD234
87T
C2,M
1125
MD235
87T
C2,M
1001
MD321
87T
C2,M,L
1116
MD324
87T
C2,M,L
1121
MD325
87T
C2,M,L
1002
MD331
87T
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 93 /692
DRS
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
3-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
4-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective restraint;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
4-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection
4-winding, 3-phase, with phase selective/ phase
overlapping restraint;
With CT saturation detection;
1117
MD334
87T
C2,M
1122
MD335
87T
C2,M
1003
MD341
87T
1118
MD344
87T
1123
MD345
87T
DID-001-1.02
Page 94 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
5.2
5.2.1
DRS
TECHNICAL DATA
Transformer Differential Protection 2-phase 2-winding
FNNR TYPE
FNNR TYPE
FNNR TYPE
1033
1119
1124
MD221
MD224
MD225
ANSI
87T
ANSI
87T
ANSI
87T
Application
C2,M,L
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 95 /692
DRS
Application:
Suitable for 2-phase, two winding transformers or two winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
Inputs
Analogue: Current system 1 phase L1
Current system 1 phase L2
Current system 2 phase L1
Current system 2 phase L2
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Auxiliary input system 1 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Auxiliary input system 2 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Bias slope:
Vector group 12:
Zero sequence filter 1:
Zero sequence filter 2:
2nd harmonic:
5th harmonic:
High set differential stage:
CT ratio compensation 21:
Higher harmonics blocking:
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
DID-001-1.02
Page 96 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 75 ms at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD224, MD225
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD221, MD224:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 3: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current equation:
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2|) / 1.
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD225
current:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 2: Bias = constant
Bias current = 2 ... 6: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 6: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current equation:
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2|) / 1.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 97 /692
DRS
5.2.2
FNNR TYPE
FNNR TYPE
FNNR TYPE
1034
1120
1125
MD231
MD234
MD235
ANSI
87T
ANSI
87T
ANSI
87T
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Page 98 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Application:
Suitable for 2-phase, three winding transformers or three winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Bias slope:
Vector group 12:
Vector group 13:
Zero sequence filter 1:
Zero sequence filter 2:
Zero sequence filter 3:
2nd harmonic:
5th harmonic:
High set differential stage:
CT ratio compensation 21:
Higher harmonics blocking:
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Page 99 /692
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 75 ms at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD234, MD235
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD231, MD234:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 3: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2|) / 1.
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD235
current:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 2: Bias = constant
Bias current = 2 ... 6: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 6: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2|) / 1.
DID-001-1.02
Page 100 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
5.2.3
DRS
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, two winding transformers or two winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Bias slope:
Vector group 12:
Zero sequence filter 1:
Zero sequence filter 2:
2nd harmonic:
5th harmonic:
High set differential stage:
CT ratio compensation 21:
Higher harmonics blocking:
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
DID-001-1.02
Page 102 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 30 ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
26 ms at 60 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD324, MD325
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD321, MD324:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 3: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD325
current:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 2: Bias = constant
Bias current = 2 ... 6: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 6: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
5.2.4
Application
C2,M
Application
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Page 104 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Application
C2,M
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, three winding transformers or three winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,1 ... 0.6 xIn in 0,01 xIn steps
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Bias slope:
Vector group 12:
Vector group 13:
Zero sequence filter 1:
Zero sequence filter 2:
Zero sequence filter 3:
2nd harmonic:
5th harmonic:
High set differential stage:
CT ratio compensation 21:
Higher harmonics blocking:
30 ... 60 % in 5 % steps
None/0/1/5/6/7/11
None/0/1/5/6/7/11
On/Off/External
On/Off/External
On/Off/External
10 ... 50 % in 1 % steps
5 ... 20 % in 1 % steps
2 ... 15 xIn in 0,5 xIn steps
0 ... 2,50 in 0,01 steps
MD334, MD335: Phase selective/phase
overlapping.
Note: MD331 ... only phase selective.
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 30 ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
26 ms at 60 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 106 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD334, MD335
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD331, MD334:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 3: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD335
current:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 2: Bias = constant
Bias current = 2 ... 6: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 6: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
5.2.5
Application
M
DID-001-1.02
Page 108 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Application
M
Application
M
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, four winding transformers or four winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Inputs
Analogue: Current system 1 phase L1
Current system 1 phase L2
Current system 1 phase L3
Current system 2 phase L1
Current system 2 phase L2
Current system 2 phase L3
Current system 3 phase L1
Current system 3 phase L2
Current system 3 phase L3
Current system 4 phase L1
Current system 4 phase L2
Current system 4 phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Auxiliary input system 1 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Auxiliary input system 2 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Auxiliary input system 3 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Auxiliary input system 4 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Bias slope:
Vector group 12:
Vector group 13:
Vector group 14:
Zero sequence filter 1:
Zero sequence filter 2:
Zero sequence filter 3:
Zero sequence filter 4:
2nd harmonic:
5th harmonic:
High set differential stage:
CT ratio compensation 21:
Higher harmonics blocking:
DID-001-1.02
Page 110 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
In Amps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 30 ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
26 ms at 60 Hz (including output relays)
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD344, MD345
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD341, MD344:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 3: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM4 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD345
current:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current = 0 ... 2: Bias = constant
Bias current = 2 ... 6: Bias = 30%
Bias current
> 6: Bias = Setting value.
Bias current =
(FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM4 L1 respectively L2
respectively L3|) / 1.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
MD221
R
L1
L3
+ X1
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
SYSTEM1
TRANSFORMER
1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
I5
I6
AUX.INPUT1
(opt.)
AUX.INPUT2 +
(opt.)
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
G
2~
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
UAKB
I SYSTEM2 L3
OUT 04
I4
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I SYSTEM2 L1
OUT 03
I3
29
SYSTEM2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 2
SI02
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MODBUS
5.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
RS422/485
5.3
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 112 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
5.3.2 MD231
+ X1
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
SYSTEM1
MAIN TRANSFORMER
3-INP.
2-PH.
SYSTEM3
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM3 L1
I SYSTEM3 L3
R
L1
T
L3
+
AUX.
INPUT1
(opt.)
+
AUX.
INPUT2
(opt.)
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
AUX.
INPUT3
(opt.)
OUT 03
I3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I SYSTEM2 L3
T
L3
I2
29
I SYSTEM2 L1
R
L1
I1
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
I SYSTEM1 L3
UAKB
1
SYSTEM1 L1 23
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
T
L3
OPTIONAL MODULE
R
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
MD321
L2
+ -
L3
X1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
TRANSFORMER
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
SYSTEM1
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
G
3~
AUX.INPUT1
(opt.)
AUX.INPUT2 +
(opt.)
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
GEN.
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
I SYSTEM2 L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I SYSTEM2 L2
SYSTEM2
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
I SYSTEM2 L1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L1
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
5.3.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 114 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ X1
1A
5A
4
ISYSTEM1 L2 56
1A
5A
7
8
ISYSTEM1 L3 9
1A
5A
10
ISYSTEM2 L1 11
12
1A
5A
ISYSTEM2 L2
13
14
15
1A
5A
ISYSTEM2 L3
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
-
AUX.INPUT1 (opt.)
+
-
AUX.INPUT2 (opt.)
AUX.INPUT3 (opt.)
+
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKB
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
SYSTEM2 SYSTEM3
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
ISYSTEM3 L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ISYSTEM3 L2
OUT 03
I3
29
ISYSTEM3 L1
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
1
2
ISYSTEM1 L1 3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
5.3.4
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
5.4
5.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
MD221
L1
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
SYSTEM1
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L3
SYSTEM2
AUX.INPUT1
(OPTIONAL)
AUX.INPUT2
G
2~
GEN.
(OPTIONAL)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
LEGEND
DRS
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Trip
Diff.Curr.
Block.
DID-001-1.02
Page 116 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L1
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L3
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L1
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L3
NOTEBOOK
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L3
FFT 1H
I0
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET
1
I0
&
BIAS
FFT 1H
&
FFT 2H>
AUX.INPUT1
AUX.INPUT2
FFT 1H
>=1
FFT 5H>
L1
L2
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP
>=1
>=1
&
TRIP
DIFF.CURRENT
&
&
DIFF.CURRENT
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCKING
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
&
BLOCKING
1
0
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
I0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
1
BIAS
DIFF.CURRENT
BLOCKING
TRIP
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 118 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
5.4.2 MD321
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
SYSTEM1
I SYSTEM1 L3
AUX.INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
AUX.INPUT2
(OPTIONAL)
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
SYSTEM2
GEN.
I SYSTEM2 L3
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
Trip
Diff.Curr.
Block.
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L1
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L2
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L3
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L1
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L2
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L3
NOTEBOOK
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
I SYSTEM1 L3
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
I SYSTEM2 L3
I0
FFT 1H
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET
|IA|+|Ia|
1
I0
&
BIAS
FFT 1H
&
FFT 2H>
AUX.INPUT1
AUX.INPUT2
FFT 1H
>=1
FFT 5H>
L1
L2
L3
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP
>=1
>=1
&
TRIP
DIFF.CURRENT
&
&
DIFF.CURRENT
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCKING
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
&
BLOCKING
1
0
FOR DETAIL:
see MD321 87T LOGIC DIAGRAMM
PROCESSING / DETAIL
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
2,00 A
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET 5
1
On
ISYSTEM1 L1 - I0
ZERO
SEQUENCE
SYSTEM1
Remark: I0 = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L2
I SYSTEM1 L3
Bias
FFT 1H
|IA|+|Ia|
1
CALCULATION
OF RESTRAINT
CURRENT 3
Operate Value
45 %
BIAS
ACT. OPER.
VALUE
Zero Sequ.Fil.Sys. 1
0,30 A
RESTR. CURR.
FFT 1H
CALCULATION
OF DIFF.
CURRENT
2nd Harmonic
CALC. OF ACT.
? I-SET VALUE
& TRIP DECISION
25 %
Off
15 %
>=1
ISYSTEM2 L1 - I0
ZERO
SEQUENCE
SYSTEM2
Remark: I0 = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
I SYSTEM2 L3
&
VECTOR
GROUP
1-2
&
CT RATIO
COMPENSATION
2-1
TRIP
1.00
FFT 1H
L1
L2
L3
LEGEND
1
2
3
4
5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
I0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
1
BIAS
DIFF.CURRENT
BLOCKING
TRIP
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 122 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
BIAS-Characteristic Differential-Protection
DRS PROCESSING / MD321
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE
ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
6,0
Set Value
BIAS
5,0
OPERATE REGION
4,0
S=
BIA
BASIC SET
VALUE
OPERATE
VALUE
3,0
Set Diff
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
2,0
1,0
1,0
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
S=
BIA
SLOPE ACC.
TO SET VALUE
BIAS
B IA
S=
BIAS
%
60
50%
40%
= 30
FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0,3)
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
INPUT:
FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ FFT 1H of |ISYSTEM3 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ ...
INPUT:
Rated Current of Protection Relay
(1AAC resp. 5AAC)
Note: The result of this diagram is the ACTUAL SET VALUE which is used to make the TRIP-decision
(shown for phase L1, 2-winding transformer):
FFT 1.H. |(ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)|
DIFF. PROT. TRIP
FFT 1.H. |(ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)|> (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
SYSTEM1
IL1
L2
L3
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yy0
(OPT.)
AUX.
INPUT2
(OPT.)
I SYSTEM2 L1
SYSTEM2
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L3
IL2
GEN.
G
3~
SYSTEM2
IL3
IL2
I1
I2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
I SYSTEM2 L2
IL1
IL3
+ -
IL2
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL1
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
L1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
OUT
15
14
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 0" (i.e. Yy0)
OUT 09
DID-001-1.02
Page 124 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
+ -
IL2
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yd1
(OPT.)
SYSTEM2
30
I SYSTEM2 L1
IL1
IL3
I SYSTEM2 L3
IL2
GEN.
G
3~
SYSTEM2
IL2
I2
IL3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
I SYSTEM2 L2
IL1
I1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL1
30
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
L1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
OUT
15
14
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 1" (i.e. Yd1)
OUT 09
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
SYSTEM1
IL1
L2
L3
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yd5
(OPT.)
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L1
IL3
IL1
GEN.
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L3
G
3~
SYSTEM2
IL1
150
I1
I2
IL2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
I SYSTEM2 L2
150
IL2
+ -
IL2
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL3
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
L1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
OUT
15
14
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 5" (i.e. Yd5)
OUT 09
DID-001-1.02
Page 126 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L2
L3
IL1
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
+ -
IL2
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yy6
(OPT.)
AUX.
INPUT2
(OPT.)
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L1
IL3
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L3
IL1
GEN.
SYSTEM2
G
3~
IL1
180
IL3
I2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
I SYSTEM2 L2
180
I1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL2
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
SYSTEM1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
OUT 09
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
15 REGULAR
14
THIS RECORDOUT
SHOWS
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 6" (i.e. Yy6)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
IL1
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yd7
(OPT.)
SYSTEM2
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L1
IL3
I SYSTEM2 L2
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L3
SYSTEM2
G
3~
IL1
210
IL3
I1
I2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
210
GEN.
+ -
IL2
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL2
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
SYSTEM1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
OUT 09
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
15 REGULAR
14
THIS RECORDOUT
SHOWS
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 7" (i.e. Yd7)
DID-001-1.02
Page 128 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
IL3
X1
SYSTEM1
IL1
IL3
IL2
IL1
I SYSTEM1 L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I SYSTEM1 L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
AUX.
INPUT1
TRANSFORMER
Yd11
(OPT.)
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L1
IL1
IL2
I SYSTEM2 L2
IL1
I SYSTEM2 L3
GEN.
G
3~
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
SYSTEM2
IL3
330
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I 10
29
330
IL3
+ -
IL2
U1
U2
U3
U4
IL2
IL1
OUT 05
DRSCOMPACT2A
L1
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
OUT 10
4
5
OUT 11
6
7
OUT 12
8
9
OUT 13
10
11
OUT 14
12
LEGEND:
13
OUT
15
14
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
OUT 16
OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 11" (i.e. Yd11)
OUT 09
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
5.5
FUNCTION
Differential protective functions are provided as a selective unit protection system against winding
short circuits and depending on system grounding also against earth faults. The measuring principle
is based on the current vector differential computation within the protected zone of the relevant sets
of CTs.
Measuring Principle:
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times per cycle. By means of the FourierAnalysis
(DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for 1st , 2nd and 5th harmonic are computed and
transferred to the CPU
The CPU evaluates for each sample instant the differential signals for each phase and checks
whether the actual setting value has been exceeded (please also refer to the BIAS characteristic
graph). If during 11 consecutive samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a trip signal
will be initiated.
By this the trip operating time consists of following single time values:
a)
Fourier-Coefficient of the differential signal reaches and exceeds the actual setting value:
Duration: 1 ... 12 Samples = 1.66 20ms, depending on the size of the differential signal,
respectively the ratio to the setting value.
b)
Safety time: 11 consecutive samples = 0.9 cycles.
Note: During the safety time the CPU is checking for any blocking conditions which can be in detail
as follows:
- 2nd harmonic is exceeding the setting value (transformer inrush current)
- 5th harmonic is exceeding the setting value (transformer overfluxing due to overvoltage)
- Blocking input of the function is set, e.g. via an external auxiliary contact or a logic function
c)
Output relay: Approximately 5 ms
d)
The sum of times is typically smaller than 30 ms.
Tripping Logic:
The trip conditions per phase are indicated in detail in the respective logic diagrams.
The vector group compensation is digitally computed according to the vector group setting ensuring
that the currents of all transformer windings are correctly in phase for the subsequent evaluation.
Any zero sequence currents of the protected plant are compensated either by the zero sequence
current compensation setting ON or via the EXTERNAL input signal in accordance to the neutral
isolator position.
The transformer ratio and the CT ratios are considered by the "CT ratio compensation system 2-1".
The current vectors are now phase-wise added to the differential current and the basic harmonic,
the
2nd harmonic and the 5th harmonic quantities are phase-wise computed.
If during 11 consecutive samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a "Trip" and
"Differential current" signal will be initiated.
Bias Current / Stabilising:
The bias currents are phase-wise computed from the 1st harmonic currents of all windings of the
transformer differential protection and the tripping conditions for each phase are illustrated in the
following graph.
DID-001-1.02
Page 130 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Please Note:
Fig. 5-19:
Standard BIAS-Characteristic for the functions:
MD221, MD224, MD231, MD234, MD321, MD324, MD331, MD334,
MD341, MD334
Fig. 5-20:
Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current for the functions:
MD225, MD235, MD325, D335, MD
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
6,0
BIAS - Characteristic
Transf.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD221/MS224/MD231/MD234/
MD321/MD324/MD331/MD334/MD341/MD344
5,0
BIAS=60%
TRIP
BIAS=50%
4,0
BIAS=40%
BIAS=30%
Set
Diff
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
3,0
2,0
1,0
N O TRIP
0,0
0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
BIAS - Characteristic
Transf.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD225/MD235/MD325/MD335/MD345
5,0
BIAS=60%
4,0
BIAS=50%
TRIP
Set
Diff
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
3,0
2,0
1,0
BIAS=40%
BIAS=30%
N O TRIP
0,0
0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
DID-001-1.02
Page 132 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
5.6
COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value and
the bias slope set according to requirements.
Also the relay outputs have to be set for the LED matrix and the TRIP matrix according to plant
requirements.
The vector group parameters have to be set according to the transformer vector group and also it
has to be considered that system 1 is the reference system.
The zero sequence current filter for system 1, system 2, system 3 and system 4 are to be set to
ON
or OFF or for "EXTERNAL" input. Using the external input contact the correct function via the
"Binary
In/Output pre-selection" has to be verified.
The parameters for the inrush blocking (2nd harmonic, 5th harmonic, high set differential stage) are
either set to the existing values to the proposed default values of the User program.
The CT ratio compensation "System 2-1" is set according to following formula.
CT ratio compensation A =
Iw2
Iw1 RT1,2
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Please note that the external injected current values can be displayed and compared with the
internal measured values, i.e. phase and differential currents, in the User operating program
display Window
The same is to be carried out for the other two phases of system 1 and the measured values
recorded.
Now the test current injection should be carried out on phase L1 in system 2.
Please note that for an uneven vector group value (delta connection of system 2) injected current is
evaluated by A 3 and by even vector group (star connection) evaluated by factor A.
Check the operating- and reset values as with system 1 for all 3 phases and record the result in the
test sheets.
The same tests as per system 2 should also be performed for system 3 and system 4 if applicable.
The trip- and alarm signals and the LED indications should be confirmed according to the relay
configuration and the connection diagrams.
Measuring with twice the differential current setting injection in system 1 and the resulting operating
time of the protective function should to be carried out for each phase either via a timer or the
"Recorded Curves" in the User program to record the measured values.
A test of the configured function blocking input should be done in conjunction with a continuously
initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal can be verified without any
external initiation.
A phase-wise check of the inrush blocking should be carried out by single phase injection of a oneway rectified DC current signal on system 1 regarding blocking and the high set differential stage
operation according to the set parameters.
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to
the plant setting values according to the plant requirements.
After the tests any temporary setting changes should be restored to the original parameter settings.
Commissioning Tests:
During commissioning the function of the protection scheme is tested during normal service
conditions.
If possible following tests under operating conditions are recommended:
- Short Circuit Test for an Internal Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases inside the protected
zone.
Block protection trips.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Note: Due to safety reasons it is recommended to take precautions against excitation system
faults (regulator failure, wrong connections, etc.) and the inadvertent opening of the short
circuit.
Suitable safety precautions are, for example, the activation of an overcurrent- and overvoltage
function. Preferably the tests are carried out with reduced settings and only after life trip
checks,
e. g. excitation contactor trip, etc.!
Connect measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or display the actual measured values
window in the User program.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation of the
differential protection. Record the operating values.
Restore the protection trips.
Shut down the generator if possible via a protection trip and remove the short circuit.
DID-001-1.02
Page 136 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
6.1
OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
FNNR TYPE
1073
ME311
ANSI
78
Application
C2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
6.2
6.2.1
TECHNICAL DATA
Out of Step Protection With Circular MHO Characteristic for 3-Pase Systems
FNNR TYPE
1073
ME311
ANSI
78
Application
C2
The out of step protective function ME311 (Out of Step Relay) is a 3-phase / 1-stage "Out of
Step Feature" relay function with configurable blocking settings during unsymmetrical load
currents and decrease of the minimum set values of the positive sequence generator current
and voltage. It is based on the computation of the time sequence and the complex evaluation
of the MHO characteristic settings based on the time event whereby the evaluation is
according to the rate of change of the impedance vector of the positive sequence current.
DID-001-1.02
Page 138 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Phase to phase voltage L2-L3
Phase to phase voltage L3-L1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous alarm
Time delayed trip
Alarm: Negative phase sequence current blocking
Setting Parameters
Base point (R1):
Offset (R1 R2):
Blinder slope:
Circle diameter:
Circle centre:
Slip pulse number:
Time window t1:
Slip cycle T1:
Time window t2:
Slip cycle T2:
Activation time T3:
Negative phase sequence:
Current interlock:
Trip:
Current direction:
Phase rotation:
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 140 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
ME311
+ L3
I L1
I L2
I L3
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
GEN.
G
3~
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I1
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
+
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
I2
OUT 01
DC
OUT 02
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 18
OUT 19
IN 02
-A
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
IN 01
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKB
L2
OPTIONAL MODULE
L1
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
6.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
6.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
6.4
6.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
ME311
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
87 Alarm
78 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 142 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ACTUAL NUMBER OF SLIP
ABS [IMPEDANCE VECTOR]
ANGLE [IMPEDANCE VECTOR]
TIME START
POS.PHASE SEQU.CURRENT
POS.PHASE SEQU.VOLTAGE
NEG.PHASE SEQU.CURRENT
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
I L1
I L2
I L3
POS.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
U1
U1
I1
I2
BLOCK
TEST
=Z1
>=1
|I1|<
|I2|>
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
Z1
I1
|U1|<
BIN. I/0
PRESET
78MHO TRIP
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
>=1
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
&
TRIP
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
ME311 78MHO LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 6-3
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
U1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
I1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
I2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
|I2|>
78MHO TRIP
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
78MHO ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
|I1|<
=Z1
..
I1
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|U1|<
U1
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 144 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
EP
xd
TRANSFORMER
IMPEDANCE
xT
UGEN
EXTERNAL SYSTEM
REACTANCE (LINE)
GRID
VOLTAGE
UGRID
zS
MODEL OF
IMPEDANCES
P.T.
PROT.RELAY
zTOTAL
EP
UGEN
~
ACT. VOLT.
VALUES / SLIP
UGRID
zS
IMPEDANCE
DIAGRAM
P.T.
PROT.RELAY
xT
zTOTAL
R
xd
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
GENERATOR
GEN. INDUCED
VOLTAGE
EP
xd
TRANSFORMER
IMPEDANCE
EXTERNAL SYSTEM
REACTANCE (LINE)
xT
UGEN
GRID
VOLTAGE
UGRID
zS
MODEL OF
IMPEDANCES
P.T.
PROT.RELAY
zTOTAL
EP
UGEN
~
ACT. VOLT.
VALUES / SLIP
UGRID
zS
IMPEDANCE
DIAGRAM
xT
P.T.
PROT.RELAY
zTOTAL
R
xd
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM
Page 146 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM
X
TRIP INSTANTANEOUS:
TRIP ON BLINDER EXIT
LOCUS
(IMP. VECTOR)
START
(GEN. NOM.
OPERATION)
TRAJECTORY OF
LOCUS DURING SLIP
TRIP DELAYED:
TRIP ON MHO-EXIT
SLOPE ANGLE OF
BLINDER R1
(& BLINDER R2)
ACTUAL NUMBER
OF SLIP IS
INCREMENTED
IMPEDANCE
CIRCLE
-0.5
0.5
BASE POINT
(R1):
POSITION
BLINDER R1
IMP. CIRCLE
CENTER
-0.5
OFFSET(R1-R2)
DISTANCE:
BLINDER R1R2
-1.0
VERTICAL BLINDER R2
VERTICAL BLINDER R1
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7
5
LOCUS
(IMP. VECTOR)
2
4
IMP.
CIRCLE
VERTICAL BLINDER R2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VERTICAL BLINDER R1
DID-001-1.02
Page 148 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
6.5
DRS
FUNCTION
6.5.1
ME311
The out of step protective function ME311 (Out of Step Relay) is a 3-phase/1-stage "Out of Step"
relay with blocking features during unsymmetrical load currents and configurable minimum values of
the generator current and generator voltage. The measuring is based on the computation of the
trajectory change of the complex impedance vector (MHO) whereby its determination is derived from
the positive sequence quantities.
Depending on the external power system parameters and the connected generators dynamic
incidences, e.g. switching operations, load changes, short circuits, auto reclosing, etc. may cause
oscillating system conditions which can endanger system stability. These consisting load oscillations
are endangering power system stability and especially critical are real power swings which may lead
to pole slipping of the generators. Since during pole slipping generally the machine current is a
multiple of the rated current and in addition the direction of the load current can change from forward
to reverse power it may lead to very high mechanical stresses on the generators.
The ME311 relay was designed to fulfil the practical requirements of system operation and the
parameter setting possibilities will comply even for the highest demands. The application is
especially recommended for complex tasks and should several function stages be required, i.e.
more than one operating characteristic respectively power swing polygons, several software function
stages (ME311) can easily be configured and combined.
Particularly to following characteristics is being referred to (please also see Setting Parameters):
- Trip:
- Current interlock:
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
- Current direction:
- Rotating field direction:
- Blocking input:
- Test input:
Explanation of the protective function according to the logic diagram (please also refer to Fig.
"ME311 78 MHO LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING"):
The generator phase currents as well as the phase to phase voltages are evaluated for all phases
since the function is designed for 3-phase systems. Consequently for the current and voltage values
the positive sequence components are computed (I1, V1) and in addition also the negative phase
sequence current value (I2) is considered which at last is applied for the blocking feature.
The result: Positive sequence phase currents and positive sequence phase to phase voltages are
computing the positive sequence impedance (Z1).
It should explicitly be noted that the relay function ME311 is based onto a three phase measuring
and not onto a customary single phase measurement especially applied in the American Region.
The latter simplification may lead to false functioning and/or trips according to the type of fault
and the involved phases and is only permissible by strict adherence to symmetrical phenomena.
A further increased functional safety of the ME311 results in a standard and a much differentiated
parameter setting possibility of this function which will fulfil even the highest demands.
The computed positive sequence impedance (Z1) is the complex impedance vector (locus) which
progression is evaluated to recognise a pole slip condition of the generator. The rate of change of
the impedance vector is shown in a simplified model of the impedance locus which is illustrated in
the following graph showing the distribution of the impedances with respect to the generator,
generator-transformer and the external power system:
DID-001-1.02
Page 150 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
~
EP
~
xd
GENERATOR
EP
xd
xT
TRANSFORMER
IMPEDANCE
zs
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
REACTANCE
(LINE)
...
Rotor EMF
...
...
ULINE
GRID
VOLTAGE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
inner generator voltage and the system voltage. During normal operation of the generator and with a
stable power system this angle will be determined from the system load conditions (real- and
reactive power output of the generator and external power consumption)
and therefore is to a large extent constant. However, during pole slipping of the generator this angle
is changing continuously and is approaching all values between 0 and 360. This will result in an
oscillation of the generator current vector which thereby is passing through all 4 power quadrants
whereby the beat frequency is in accordance to the rate of change of the rotor angle.
In principle we have two voltage sources which are connected via the sum of impedances whereby
the voltage vector of the rigid power system remains constant and the voltage vector of the inner
generator EMF is rotating through 360.
What is happening now with the impedance vector in respect to the time event is shown in Fig.
"ME311 78 MHO Trip Conditions".
DID-001-1.02
Page 152 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
6.6
COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
6.6.1
Pre-Commissioning:
The function ME311 can generally only be verified during the pre-commissioning tests due to
reasons of the extensive complexibility thereby requiring a three phase test equipment which can
also carry out dynamic simulations with a corresponding long time preparation for these tests.
Therefore two variants of tests to simplify the function tests and to verify the correct operation are
recommended which do not require too much effort.
A. Simplified Function Test / Method No 1
The impedance vector is shifted within the impedance circle from left to right (R axis = Re (Z);
X axis = Im (Z)) at the R axis from the right outside the impedance circle (please also refer to the
setting parameters) and shifted to the left by continuously reducing the voltage up to a negative
value.
Should the relay test set not be able to produce negative voltage values (the angle changes from 0
to 180) the voltage polarity has to be changed manually and its amplitude raised again.
However for this simplified test method some setting parameters have to be changed temporarily:
Circle centre:
Current interlock:
Current direction:
Phase rotation:
Preferably 0 Ohm;
It has to be ensured that the locus is having a transition according
to the specified sequence (see logic diagrams).
1
0.01 s;
Since this is a minimum value for the test the smallest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of minimum time
duration.
Can be left to the original setting because of slip pulse number = 1.
20 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of maximum time
exceeded.
Can be left to the original setting because of slip pulse number = 1.
60 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of maximum time
exceeded (in principle also 20 s would be sufficient since T1 has then
already expired).
0A
According to the injected test current
According to the injected test current
By a 1 xIn rated protection relay, for example following current- and voltage values are injected:
Voltage:
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Current:
Impedance angle:
Time running:
Positive sequence current:
Positive sequence voltage:
Unbalanced load:
Shows only 1 slip since after the 1st pole slip already a trip is being
initiated.
When injecting 3 x 100 V phase to phase voltage and 3 x 1 xIn phase
current the absolute value of the impedance vector is 57.7 Ohm
(impedance = phase voltage / phase current).
Note: For the computation of the complex impedance vector the
positive sequence values of the 1st harmonic of current and voltage are
applicable, i.e. the relay evaluates all three phases.
Show at the beginning of a pole slip 0 and then 180.
Changes after crossing the blinder R1 from right from to left from "Yes"
to "No".
Should be a constant display of 1 A (by correct phase rotation
according to the "phase rotation" setting value).
Should be a constant display of 100 V of the phase to phase voltages
(by correct phase rotation according to the "phase rotation" setting
value).
Should be a constant display of 0 % (since the injected current system
is symmetrical)
Alarm / Trip:
The instantaneous operation is initiated at the 1st slip during crossing of R1 and the trip is carried out
with the last pole slip (in this case it is 1st slip) when crossing R2 ("instantaneous trip") respectively
when leaving the impedance circle ("delayed trip")...
Note: Please also refer to the setting parameter "Trip: Instantaneous / Delayed".
.
DID-001-1.02
Page 154 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
The impedance vector is shifted continuously within the impedance plane (R axis = Re (Z); X axis =
Im (Z)) whereby during a 360 revolution first the two load blinders are crossed in the specified
direction within the impedance circle and then outside the impedance circle is returning to its point of
origin. This way the specified operating sequence of the ME3111 function has been fulfilled.
With modern relay test sets it is easy to shift the impedance vector whereby it is recommended to
keep the voltage vector angle constant and rotate the current vector.
It is of advantage to illustrate the movement of the impedance vectors on a hand-sketch. This
way the progression of the vector absolute value can easily estimated during the tests. It is noted
that the test can only be carried out correctly when the impedance circle centre is not located at the
mid-point of the coordinate system of the impedance plane but off-set either in the positive- or
negative direction (if necessary a temporary shift has to be configured). Also it has to be made
certain that the impedance vector is located outside of the impedance circle prior to the test and
then shifted within the impedance circle by choosing the required phase rotation. The return
trajectory of the impedance vector should however be outside the impedance circle.
For this simplified test method some setting parameters have to be changed temporarily:
Circle centre:
0.01 s;
Since this is a minimum value for the test the smallest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of minimum time
duration.
20 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of maximum time
exceeded.
20 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of maximum time
exceeded.
60 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting
is selected to prevent a function reset because of maximum time
exceeded.
Current interlock:
Current direction:
0A
According to the injected test current
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Phase rotation:
By a 1 xIn rated protection relay, for example following current- and voltage values are injected:
Voltage:
Current:
Slip pulses:
Slip impedance:
Shows the number of pole slips; this counter is activated during each
crossing of the blinder R1
from right to left.
When injecting 3 x 100 V phase to phase voltage and 3 x 1 xIn phase
current the absolute value of the impedance vector is 57.7 Ohm
(impedance = phase voltage / phase current).
Note: For the computation of the complex impedance vector the
positive sequence values of the 1st harmonic of current and voltage are
applicable, i.e. the relay evaluates all three phases.
DID-001-1.02
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
Unbalanced load:
DRS
Shows at the beginning of a pole slip 0 and is then rotating during the
slip (rotation of the impedance vector) continuously through 360.
Changes after crossing the blinder R1 from right from to left from "Yes"
to "No".
Should be a constant display of 1 A (by correct phase rotation
according to the "phase rotation" setting value).
Should be a constant display of 100 V of the phase to phase voltages
(by correct phase rotation according to the "phase rotation" setting
value).
Should be a constant display of 0 % (since the injected current system
is symmetrical).
Alarm / Trip:
The instantaneous operation is initiated at the 1st slip during crossing of R1 and the trip is carried out
with the last pole slip (in this case it is 1st slip) when crossing R2 ("instantaneous trip") respectively
when leaving the impedance circle ("delayed trip")...
Note: Please also refer to the setting parameter "Trip: Instantaneous / Delayed".
IMPORTANT:
After completion of the pre-commissioning tests all setting parameters have to be restored to the
original service operating values.
Commissioning Tests
A real pole slip during commissioning is for various reasons mostly not possible (system stability,
etc.).
Therefore it is recommended that during normal service operation of the generator the "window
display for the actual relay-internal computed values" should be taken to analyse the actual
computed values and to verify their plausibility, especially:
-System impedance
-Impedance vector angle
-Positive sequence current
-Positive sequence voltage
-Negative sequence current
Further also the digital inputs
-Blocking input
-Test input
And the digital outputs
-Alarm
-Trip
-Annunciation: Negative phase sequence interlock
Should be checked via the menu item: "System"/"Binary In/Output Selection".
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
6.7
Generator-, Transformer- and Power System Data (according to the data sheets of the
Manufacturer):
Note: All particulars in reverence to the generator nominal values (=100%).
xd = 33 %
XT = 15 %
zS = 24 %
...
...
...
Determination of the protection relay internal range for the rotor angle Alarm:
= 120 ... 240 [degrees electrical]
Note:
Rotor angle ... the angle between vectors EP and VLine
EP ... the induced stator voltage of the synchronous generator (EMF)
VLine ... power system voltage
Adaptation of the impedance values respectively the setting parameters:
Note: This adaptation is necessary when: 1 p.u. protection relay 1 p.u. generator.
a)
The nominal values for the protection relay:
1 p.u. relay:
b)
In our example we assume that the rated values of the generator do not correspond with the
nominal rating of the protection relay:
1 p.u. generator:
Arbitrary assumption:
0.8A; 115V.
c)
Result:
An adaptation is necessary.
Adaptation factor = A = (Vgenerator nominal/Vrelay nominal) x (Irelay nominal/Igenerator nominal) =
= (115V/ 100V) x (1A/0,95A) = 1.09
d)
With this adaption factor A are now corrected in order to obtain the "adapted impedance values"
respectively the final setting parameters for the ME311 function:
xd set
XT set
zS set
=
=
=
33 % x 1.09 =
15 % x 1.09 =
24 % x 1.09 =
36 %
16.4 %
26.2 %
DID-001-1.02
Page 158 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
~
EP
~
xd
GENERATOR
EP
xd
xT
TRANSFORMER
IMPEDANCE
zs
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
REACTANCE
(LINE)
...
Rotor EMF
...
...
ULINE
GRID
VOLTAGE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7.1
OVERVIEW
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: ME . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1041
ME121
40
C2,M
1043
ME122
40
C2,M
1027
ME321
40
C2,M
1042
ME322
40
C2,M
1070
ME323
40
C2,M
1071
ME324
40
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Page 160 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2
7.2.1
DRS
TECHNICAL DATA
Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)
FNNR TYPE
1041
ME121
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
2- stage under excitation protection for single phase systems with rotor angle measuring and
consideration of the rotor current (AC).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Rotor current (AC)
Generator voltage L1-L2
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (>)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation<)
Test input stage 1 (>)
Test input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (>)
Trip stage 1 (>)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance:
Power system reactance:
Voltage direction:
Operating value stage 1:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Tripping time stage 2:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Rotor angle: 2% electrical of rotor angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 162 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2.2
DRS
Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)
FNNR TYPE
1043
ME122
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
2-stage under excitation protection for single phase systems with rotor angle measuring and
consideration of the rotor current (DC).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME122
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Generator voltage L1-L2
Rotor current (DC Input)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (>)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Test input stage 1 (>)
Test input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (>)
Trip stage 1 (>)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance:
Power system reactance:
Voltage direction:
Operating value stage 1:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Tripping time stage 2:
Rotor current configuration:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Rotor angle: 2% electrical of rotor angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 164 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2.3
DRS
Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)
FNNR
1027
TYPE
ME321
ANSI
40
Applicati
on
C2,M
2- stage under excitation protection for three phase systems with rotor angle measuring and
consideration of the rotor current (AC).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME321
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Rotor current (AC)
Generator voltage phase L2-L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (>)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Test input stage 1 (>)
Test input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (>)
Trip stage 1 (>)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance:
Power system reactance:
Voltage direction:
Operating value stage 1:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Tripping time stage 2:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Rotor angle: 2% electrical of rotor angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 166 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2.4
DRS
Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)
FNNR TYPE
1042
ME32
2
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
3- stage under excitation protection for three phase systems with rotor angle measuring and
consideration of the rotor current (DC).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME322
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Generator voltage phase L2-L3
Rotor current (DC)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (>)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Test input stage 1 (>)
Test input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (>)
Trip stage 1 (>)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance:
Power system reactance:
Voltage direction:
Operating value stage 1:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Tripping time stage 2:
Rotor current configuration:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
Rotor angle: 2% electrical of rotor angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 168 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2.5
DRS
Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)
FNNR TYPE
1070
ME32
3
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
3-stage MHO under excitation protection with consideration of the rotor current.
Instantaneous operation stage 1 when the locus is entering the reactance circle.
Instantaneous operation stage 2 when the locus is entering the reactance circle
and simultaneous decrease of the minimum permissible rotor current (measurement
of the rotor current: AC).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME323
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Rotor current (AC)
Generator voltage phase L2-L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Blocking input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Test input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Test input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (impedance circle)
Trip stage 1 (impedance circle)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Centre point (reactance circle):
Diameter (reactance circle):
Voltage direction:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Page 170 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.2.6
DRS
Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)
FNNR TYPE
1071
ME32
4
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME324
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Generator voltage phase L2-L3
Rotor current (DC)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Blocking input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Test input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Test input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (impedance circle)
Trip stage 1 (impedance circle)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Centre point (reactance circle):
Diameter (reactance circle):
Voltage direction:
Tripping time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Tripping time stage 2:
Rotor current configuration:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Page 172 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
ME121
1-PH
16 2/3 Hz
L1
L3
R
T
+ -
3-PH
50 Hz
X1
EXC.
TRANSF.
MAIN
TRANSF.
IExc. AC
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
ROTOR
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 06
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
OUT 19
OUT 20
OUT 21
OUT 22
IG L1
OUT 24
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
future use (hardware extension)
IEC870 5-103 control system interface
chain line data interface
control system interface
UAKBFAULT
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKB
LEGEND:
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE
UG L2L3
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X4
DRS INPUT
PHASORS:
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
UG L1L3
GEN.
1A
5A
29
IG L1
G
2~
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
7.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
7.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME122
+ 3-PH 50Hz
X1
EXC.
TRANSF.
MAIN
TRANSF.
IG L1
UG L1L3
G
2~
ROTOR
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) -
mV
MEASURING
TRANSDUCER
mV mA
DRS INPUT
PHASORS:
IG L1
mA
UG L2L3
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4...20mA
1A
5A
29
RMEAS
GEN.
4
5
6
UAKB
L3
T
1A
5A
OPTIONAL MODULE
L1
R
1
2
3
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
FRONTSIDE
MODBUS
1-PH
16 2/3 Hz
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
7.3.2
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
ME321
L2
+ -
L3
X1
IExc. AC
TRANSFORMER
IG L1
G
3~
ROTOR
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
DRS INPUT
PHASORS:
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
IG L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 06
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
LEGEND:
5
6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
7
-UAKB
Transducer 1
8
Transducer 2
9
Shaft Current
10
Rotor E/F
11
CAN BUS
future use (hardware extension)
12
X9/X10
IEC870 5-103 control system interface 13
RS422/485
chain line data interface
14
MODBUS
control system interface
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UG L2L3
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
UG L2L3
GEN.
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L1
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
7.3.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7.3.4
ME322
DID-001-1.02
Page 176 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
+ X1
TRANSFORMER
IG L1
RSHUNT
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
ROTOR
UG L2L3
GEN.
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
DRS INPUT
PHASORS:
IG L1
LEGEND:
1 Measuring shunt
(DC-EXC. CURRENT)
nd
2 There is a 2 meas. transducer
inside the DRS COMPACT
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I8
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 18
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKB
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
IN 01
OPTIONAL MODULE
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 11
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EXTERNAL DEVICE:
+ 8
MEASURING
9
mV TRANSDUCER 4..20mA
10
mV mA
2
11
12
13
14
which is programable.
OUT 07
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 09
I9
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
UG L2L3
(UAKB)
CAN BUS
X9/X10
interface
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 04
I4
I5
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
G
3~
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L1
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7.3.5
ME323
L2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
L3
PROCESSING
L1
IG L1
ME323 (Relais1) [STANDARD]
IExc.AC
TRANSFORMER
UG L2L3
G
3~
ROTOR
ME323 (Relais2) [OPTION]
GEN.
TEST ST.1
OPTIONAL
(APPLIES TO ME323/
RELAY1 & RELAY2)
TEST ST.2
BLOCK. ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
DRS
CB1
CB2
OUTPUT
LEGEND
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
DID-001-1.02
Page 178 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
ME321
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
IG L1
EXC.
TRANSF.
IExc.AC
MAIN
TRANSF.
UG L2L3
GEN.
G
3~
ROTOR
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
OUTPUT
BLOCK. ST.2
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CB1
CB2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR ANGLE IN DEGREE
NOTEBOOK
IG L1
UG
UG L2L3
IG . xq*)
v3
>
IG . xline*)
IExc.AC
&
|IExc/AC| <
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
>=1
TEST ST.2
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1 >
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
FUNCTION
&
TRIP ST.2
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 180 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: ME321
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
OUTPUT
1
0
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
UG
IG . xq*)
v3
IG . xline*)
> SET
>
|IExc/AC| <
LEDMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
> SET
ALARM ST.2
TRIP ST.1
t1 > set
TRIP ST.2
t2 > set
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
VOLTAGE DIAGRAM
OF A SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR):
DEF. OF ROTOR ANGLE (THEORY)
+
Iq xq
Iq xd
I xd
Id xd
1,5
I xq
1,0
U
I
Iq
0,5
Id
+j
1,0
0,5
0,5
1,0
-j
Iq(xd-xq)
xd-xq
xq
LEGEND
U
I
E
xd
xq
generator voltage
generator current
magnet wheel voltage (corresponds with sum of magnetic flux F e)
direct-axis syncronous reactance
quadrature-axis syncronous reactance
inner rotor angle
phase angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 182 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
EP
j.Igen.xq
i+a
Ugen
a
Igen
Ugrid
-j.Igen.xline
LEGEND
Ugen
Igen
EP
i
a
i+a
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
POWER DIAGRAM
OF SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR):
CALCULATION OF ROTOR ANGLE (EXAMPLE)
ACTIVE POWER
ACTIVE CURRENT
cos
underexcited
1,0
0,9
0,6
Iq
E/x
overexcited
0,8
e)
I
h
IN
w it
sp.
e
r
0,6
r
(co
d
0,4
xd-xq
xd
xd-xq
xq .xd
0,6
I=1
I=0,5
underexcited
U
0,9
overexcited
REACTIVE POWER
REACTIVE CURRENT
U
xd
U
xq
DID-001-1.02
Page 184 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
POWER DIAGRAM
OF A SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR)
Active Power (p.u.)
UNDEREXC. LIMITING
REGULATOR OF EXC. SYSTEM
PROTECTION SYSTEM
TRIP 2
0,9
0,8
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,8
on
Trip
0,6
0,9
0,7
Norm
a l Op
erati
0,7
1,0
0,6
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,5
0,4
0,4
0,3
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,9
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
-0,6 -0,5 -0,4 -0,3 -0,2 -0,1 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
Sample in practice:
1
2
3
4
5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7.4.2
ME322
IG L1
OUT 22
OUT 23
OUT 24
0A DC
200A DC
RS 232
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
SI02
X2
4
5
6
7
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
CAN BUS
NC
CANL
GND
NC
NC
GND
CANH
NC
NC
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE
15 +
IN 08
16 G
ROTOR
X7
GEN.
3~
RSHUNT
1
2
IEXC
3
4
5
VSHUNT
6
7
EXTERNAL DEVICE:
+ 8
MEASURING
EXAMPLE:
9
TRANSDUCER 4..20mA
0...10V DC
10
IEXC = 0...1000A DC (nom. exc. curr.)
mV mA
- 11
VSHUNT = 0...10V DC (RSHUNT = 0,01O)
12
13
Output of meas. transducer = 4...20mA
14
Input of DRS-COMPACT2A / UAKB = 4...20mA (used range 4...7,2mA)
UAKBOutput of DRS-COMPACT2A / UAKB = 1...5V DC (corr. with 4...7,2mA input)
FAULT
Input VE2 / slow input 03 (SI03) = 1...5V DC
SOFTWARE CONVERSION (VE2 FIRMWARE): 1...5V DC 0...200A DC (by
FRONTSIDE
setting)
11
12
13
14
15
16
X10
X11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
500A DC
1000A DC
Rotor current:
(=nom. exc. curr.)
Shunt-voltage
(RSHUNT = 0,01O)
input of ext. meas. transducer:
0V DC
2,0V DC
10V DC
4mA DC
7,2mA DC
20mA DC
1V DC
5V DC
0A DC
200V AC
LIMIT for
indication on
notebookscreen.
0A DC = 0%
200A DC = 20% of
nom. exc. curr.
For example:
chosen setting
(5...10% of nom IEXC)
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
ME322/ OPTION:
SUPERVISION OF MEAS. TRANSDUCER-CIRCUIT OF ROTORCURRENT
1000A DC
200A DC
ROTOR CURRENT:
VE2-input voltage:
Please note:
min. input voltage = 1V (regular operation) 1V
conclusion: input volt. < 1V malfunciton
of meas. transducer-circuit.
5V DC
SI03
( ROTORCURR.)
1...5V
DC
ME322
UNDEREXC.
MU120
UNDERVOLTAGE
CHECK: UDC < 1V
WARNING:
MEAS. TRANSDUCERCIRCUIT
IS FAULTY!
ALARM
TRIP
BLK!
(opt.)
OUT
WARNING
PROCESSING
LEGEND:
1 Software-relay UNDEREXC. 3-PH. DC
input signal must be 1...5V DC (regular operation)
2 Software-relay UNDERVOLT.. DC
input voltage must be 1...5V DC (regular operation)
practical setting (example): 0,5V/ undervoltage WARNING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
ME323
L2
+ -
L3
X1
IExc. AC
TRANSFORMER
IG L1
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) -
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
UAKB
ROTOR
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
4
5
6
OPTIONAL MODULE
G
3~
1A
5A
29
UG L2L3
GEN.
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L1
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
7.4.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|Z| Impedance Distance
NOTEBOOK
IG L1
full load
over-excited
UG L2L3
Z
inside circle
R
Z
IExc.AC
Relais2
(opt.)
|IExc.AC|<
Relais1
(standard)
/Stage1
2
part load
under-excited
/Stage1
1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t1>
&
TRIP ST.1
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
1
Standard-Impedance-Circle:
1.stage: Z inside circle
2.stage: (Z inside circle) & ( IExc.<)
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
7.4.4 ME324
L2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
L3
PROCESSING
L1
IExc.DC
TRANSFORMER
IG L1
RSHUNT
UG L2L3
G
3~
ROTOR
ME323 (Relais2) [OPTION]
GEN.
TEST ST.1
OPTIONAL
(APPLIES TO ME323/
RELAY1 & RELAY2)
TEST ST.2
BLOCK. ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
DRS
CB1
CB2
OUTPUT
LEGEND
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
DID-001-1.02
Page 190 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|Z| Impedance Distance
NOTEBOOK
IG L1
full load
over-excited
UG L2L3
Z
inside circle
R
Z
IExc.DC
Relais2
(opt.)
IExc.DC <
Relais1
(standard)
/Stage1
2
part load
under-excited
/Stage1
1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t1>
&
TRIP ST.1
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
1
Standard-Impedance-Circle:
1.stage: Z inside circle
2.stage: (Z inside circle) & ( IExc.<)
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
calculation of phasor Z
Z
inside circle
under-excitation detected
(ALARM starts)
full load
over-excited
R
Z
Relais2
(opt.)
Relais1
(standard)
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
/Stage1
part load
under-excited
/Stage1
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.2
TRIP ST.1
TRIP ST.2
>
<
ME323, ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC, DC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 7-19
DID-001-1.02
Page 192 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
R
xd
2
center =
xd xd
+
2
2
xd
2
diameter
xd
center
tstage1
= 0s
xd
[p.u.]
2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
R
xd
2
center of
circle 2 =
center of
circle 1 =
xd xd
+
2
2
xd
1
+
2
2
diameter of
circle 2 =
1 [p.u.]
diameter of
circle 1 =
xd [p.u.]
2
xd
xd
[p.u.] +
2
2
= 0,5s
tstage1
(of ME323/ relay no.1)
centre of circle 2
xd
1
[p.u.] +
2
2
tstage1
= 0s
(of ME323/ relay no.2)
DID-001-1.02
Page 194 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
7.5
FUNCTION
The under excitation function provides protection against disturbance in the excitation system of
synchronous machines thereby preventing possible mechanical damages due to load oscillations in
the power system by initiating a short time trip signal to the respective circuit breaker.
7.5.1
As a trip criterion the rotor angle and the excitation current Ie of the protected synchronous
generator are evaluated whereby following logic functions are applicable:
Rotor angle >Limit (rotor angle conditions are exceeded) initiates an alarm and a
long time delayed trip
Rotor angle >Limit and excitation current Ie<Ie,Limit (rotor angle exceeded and low
excitation current) initiates an alarm and a short time delayed trip.
The rotor angle i of the generator is computed from the generator current Igen and the
generator voltage Vgen according to the simplified vector diagram.
Rotor EMF
Igen.Xq
Vgen
a
Igen
-Igen.Xn
Vsystem
Fig. 7-22
The practical definitive stability condition of the generator with the overall static rotor angle
between the rotor voltage Ep and the rigid power system voltage Vnet is computed as the sum
of the inner rotor angle i and the outer rotor angle a.
As shown on the above graph the outer rotor angle is derived from the power system reactance
Xn, i.e. the reactance between generator leads and the rigid power system.
This reactance is evaluated according to the power system values whereby for short
transmission lines the short circuit reactance of the generator-transformer is applicable.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
In the arithmetical process of evaluating the different function variants for three phase systems the
secondary CT/VT signals are sampled 12 times each cycle, e.g. phase current L1 and
the phase to phase voltage V L2-L3. With the aid of the parameters Xq und Xn the vector Ep
and Vnet is computed with the Fourier Transformation according to value and phase angle position
and thereby the rotor angle is determined.
Also the value of the generator voltage is evaluated and in case of being smaller than 70 V
secondary the protective function will be blocked.
For models in single phases systems according to the above vector diagram the phase
displacement of the current Igen and the reactance Xq, respectively Xn by displacing the
phase voltage by 90 (corresponds to a displacement of 3 sample intervals) are considered
and in the same way the rotor angle is being evaluated.
After each sample interval of the computed rotor angle there is a comparison with the
configured trigger value and when being exceeded 24 times in a consecutive sequence
the instantaneous initiation is carried out for stage 1 and the time delay for stage 1 is initiated.
In case of the trigger value being exceeded during the whole delay range a tripping signal will
be given.
Depending on the selected function variant the excitation current is either measured by a CT signal
or evaluated from a rotor current shunt via a measuring transducer and as a DC
voltage transferred to a slow analogue input of the protective system.
In the first case the excitation current value is determined with the Fourier Transformation and
in the second one the excitation current is evaluated in a DC voltage stage.
Again, the computation is carried out for each sample interval, i.e. 12 times each cycle and the
calculated rotor current value compared with the configured setting parameter. Should during 24
consecutive cycles this value be exceeded and also the rotor angle trigger level is above its setting,
i.e. stage 1 initiated, then the starting signal for stage 2 is set and the time delay stage 2
triggered. In case of the stage 2 setting value remains above the trigger value during the whole time
delay of stage 2 a trip signal is initiated. Of course the starting- and trip stages are only set when not
being suppressed by the aforementioned 70V undervoltage interlock or a blocking signal. Also when
applying a test signal at the corresponding function input a test algorithm is
started independent from the measured values which eventually is producing a function trip.
The initiating signal and the trip output is reset when during 36 consecutive samples (3 cycles)
the initiating conditions are not fulfilled (trip output extension).
DID-001-1.02
Page 196 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
7.5.2
DRS
The MHO functions ME323 and ME324 are computing the complex impedance vector on the basis
of the generator current and of phase L1 and the phase to phase voltage L2-L3.
Tripping conditions are derived when the impedance vector is entering the impedance circle
defined by the setting parameters (1. stage) whereas the 2. stage is in addition also considering the
excitation undercurrent value. The excitation current measuring is performed on the AC side for
function ME323 and on the Dc side for function ME324.
Details:
Display Window:
"Impedance Distance" (refer to internal display window) means:
Distance of the Impedance Point to the Centre of the Impedance Circle. (Distance between Locus
and Centre of Impedance Circle).
That means this value has to be compared with the radius of the circle.
The Circle Reactance is the "Impedance Distance" to the centre of the reactance circle (actually
the Impedance Circle and not the border of the circle.
The display range is up to 10.5 p.u., i.e. above this value a >Display Range is indicated.
The display Circle Reactance is in principle a radius whereas the corresponding parameter setting
Diameter is actually the diameter. So the two values cannot be compared directly.
Note to the Setting Parameters:
Offset =
Recommended Settings:
These recommendations are based on the GE Study GER-3183.
A. Single Stage Solution (With 1 Impedance Circle):
Ensures a certain trip for excitation faults at all power system load conditions but tends to false
tripping in case of stable rotor oscillations.
Therefore loss of synchronism is not definitely recognised under all possible load conditions.
Recommended Settings:
Offset =
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DRS Parameters:
Circle for 1. Stage (Large Circle):
Setting value centre point = xd/2 + xd/2 ...[p.u.]
Setting value circle diameter = xd ...[p.u.]
Setting value time delay = 0.5 sec.
DID-001-1.02
Page 198 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
7.6
COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
7.6.1
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external wiring connections have to be checked.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections.
The parameters xq and xn as well as the operating values and time delays of stage 1 and 2
have to be set to the computed values.
The generator loading diagram has to be considered to determine the reactance setting
values as outlined in the diagram below.
p
underexcited
overexcited
1
limit
q
V2 /xq
Thereby:
As shown on the above load diagram the power rating of the machine depends onto the
-Maximum excitation current
-Maximum stator current, respectively the maximum turbine rating
-Practical stability vector and
-Minimum excitation current
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
To obtain the reactance setting value xq a straight line as close as possible to the loading
diagram is drawn and the crossing with the represents the 1/xq value.
Please note that this fictive reactance xq is generally not identical to the real reactance
xq of the specified xq by the generator manufacturer, the latter being not suitable for practical
protection applications since it does not represent the optimum configuration of the required
protective function range.
To adapt the computed reactance value to the relevant CT and VT ratios a configuration
factor F is determined according to following formula:
FF =
With
Vn
VTp
VTs
In
Ip
Un UW,s IW,p
.
.
UW,p 100 In
xq,n = xq.F
The power system reactance Xn is adapted with the same factor.
Also the configuration of the rotor angle has to be verified according to the above load
diagram whereby it has to be realised that the rotor angle measurement in the above diagram
is displayed for the inner rotor angle only and considering the usual system reactance an
increase of the angle by about 5 has to be taken into account.
When setting the rotor angle also the characteristic of the excitation limiter settings are having
an influence and therefore the configured values have to be selected accordingly to provide an
an ample safety margin.
The operating value for the excitation undercurrent interlock either for AC- or DC evaluation
should be selected to approximately 10% of the nominal off-load excitation current.
Finally, the DRS System outputs for the LED matrix and the tripping matrix are to be set
according to plant requirements.
Protective function tests are preferably performed with the plant out of service and, e.g. with
the relay test set a test current is injected into phase L1 and the nominal secondary test
voltage applied to phase L2-L3 whereby the phase angle between voltage and current has to
be known and/or adjustable. The value of the rotor angle is to be verified by selecting the software
option actual measured values in the relay window.
DID-001-1.02
Page 200 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Between the injected test signals current I and voltage V and the displayed rotor angle there is a
relation as per the formula below:
= arctan
p
2
u
+q
xq
+ arctan
p
2
u
q
xn
p=
U.I.cos
..............relative real power in P.U.
Un.In
p=
U.I.sin
Un.In
u=
U
........... relative generator voltage in P.U.
Un
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
For each stage the configured blocking inputs should be checked by applying the corresponding
external signal whereby the trip outputs have to reset.
The configured function test for each stage can be checked for each stage by setting the test
signal input and the respective function stage has to operate without any external CT/VT inputs.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters setting must be configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
DID-001-1.02
Page 202 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
8.1
OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function Number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function Type (short denomination of the protective function)
... ANSI Device Number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MF . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1022
MF111
81
C2,M,L
1023
MF121
81
C2,M,L
1024
MF141
81
C2,M,L
Frequency gradient
1075
MF112
81
C2,M
2036
MF311
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.2
TECHNICAL DATA
8.2.1
MF111
FNNR TYPE
1022
MF111
ANSI
Application
81
C2,M,L
MF111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Note: There is no definite allocation of the analogue input required.
ATTENTION: The respective synchronising channel is applied
automatically (V respectively I channel).
Pleas note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels
regarding the requirements of the frequency protection are selected
correctly.
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Parameter Settings
Minimum voltage:
Maximum voltage:
Operating value:
Type:
Operating time:
DID-001-1.02
Page 204 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: 20 ms ... 85 ms (depending on the rate of
frequency change).
Condition: SYNC channel must be active for
approximately 1 sec.
Accuracy: Typical 0.01 Hz
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.2.2
MF121
FNNR TYPE
1023
MF121
ANSI
Application
81
C2,M,L
2-stage frequency function selectable for over- or underfrequency detection per stage.
MF121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Note: There is no definite allocation of the analogue input required.
ATTENTION: The respective synchronising channel is applied
automatically (V respectively I channel).
Pleas note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels
regarding the requirements of the frequency protection are selected
correctly.
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Parameter Settings
Minimum voltage:
Maximum voltage:
Operating value step 1:
Type Step 1:
Operating time Step 1:
Operating value Step 2:
Type Step 2:
Operating time Step 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 206 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: 20 ms ... 85 ms (depending on the rate of
frequency change).
Condition: SYNC channel must be active for
approximately 1 sec.
Accuracy: Typical 0.01 Hz
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.2.3
MF141
FNNR TYPE
1024
MF14
1
ANSI
Application
81
C2,M,L
4-stage frequency function selectable for over- or underfrequency detection per stage.
MF141
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Note: There is no definite allocation of the analogue input required.
ATTENTION: The respective synchronising channel is applied
automatically (V respectively I channel).
Pleas note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels
regarding the requirements of the frequency protection are selected
correctly.
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Blocking input stage 4
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Test input stage 4
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Alarm stage 3
Trip stage 3
Alarm stage 4
Trip stage 4
DID-001-1.02
Page 208 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Parameter Settings
Minimum voltage:
Maximum voltage:
Operating value stage 1:
Type stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Type stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Operating value stage 3:
Type stage 3:
Operating time stage 3:
Operating value stage 4:
Type stage 4:
Operating time stage 4:
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: 20 ms ... 85 ms (depending on the rate of
frequency change).
Condition: SYNC channel must be active for
approximately 1 sec.
Accuracy: Typical 0.01 Hz
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
MF112
FNNR TYPE
Frequency gradient
1075
MF11
2
ANSI
81
Application
C2,M
MF112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Note: There is no definite allocation of the analogue input required.
ATTENTION: The respective synchronising channel is applied
automatically (V respectively I channel).
Pleas note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels
regarding the requirements of the frequency protection are selected
correctly.
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Parameter Settings
Minimum voltage: 60 ... 100 V in 1 V steps
Maximum voltage: 100 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Operating value: 0.1 ... 15 Hz/s in 0.1 Hz/s Schritten
Note:
Recommended range for 50 Hz systems: 0.1 ...
11 Hz/s;
Recommended range for 60 Hz systems: 0.1 ...
13 Hz/s.
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps
Evaluation time constant: 1 ... 15 cycles in 0.5 cycle - steps
DID-001-1.02
Page 210 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: Depending on the setting parameter "evaluation
time constant"
Accuracy: Typical 0.1 Hz/s (depending on the setting
parameter " evaluation time constant ")
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.2.4
MF311
FNNR TYPE
2036
MF311
ANSI
Application
L
3-phase, 1-stage voltage vector shift function with common instantaneous - and time delayed
trip outputs.
MF311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: V1
V2
V3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Vector shift trip
Parameter Settings
Vector shift: 2 ... 30 phase angle shift
in 1 - steps
Trip delay: 1 ... 3 cycles
in steps of 1 period
Blocking U<: 10 ... 120 V in 0.5 V - steps
Mode: 1-phase
3-phase
Measuring
DID-001-1.02
Page 212 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Operating time: Setting (in cycles) + 1 sample
Setting (in cycles) + 12 samples
Note: Operating time can vary up to a maximum
of 11 samples according to
value of the phase shift.
Accuracy: Typical 1 el.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
X1
(optional)
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
-
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 09
UAKB
(standard)
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L1L2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 03
I3
29
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
8.3.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
8.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 214 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
8.3.2
MF311
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.4
8.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
MF112
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
1
PROCESSING
V L1L2
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
Alarm
Trip
DID-001-1.02
Page 216 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
set value
AVERAGE TIME CONSTANT
V L1L2
CALC. OF
FREQ. GRAD.
df/dt
CALC. OF
f
V<
set value
MIN. VOLT. SETTING
V>
set value
MAX. VOLT. SETTING
FREQ.
GRAD.
value
> set
OPER. VALUE
&
ALARM
LEDDISPLAY
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM
>=1
BLOCK. ST.1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDMATRIX
ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP
t1>
&
FUNCTION
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
1
DRS-INTERNAL SYNC-CHANNEL
WILL BE USED AUTOMATICALLY
(U resp. I)!
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MF112
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALC. OF
FREQ. GRAD.
df/dt
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
FREQ.
GRAD.
value
> set
OPER. VALUE
EXAMPLE:
set = 1Hz/s
50Hz
NO TRIP
time
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 218 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
8.5
8.5.1
FUNCTION
MF111/ MF121/ MF141
Electric plant and machinery are generally designed for only a small operating range regarding
the rated frequency. Therefore, any inadmissible deviations from the nominal frequency have
to be monitored and subsequently corrected by suitable corresponding control- and switching
operations to ensure frequency stabilisation into the nominal range and/or initiating plant shut
down of the endangered equipment
The measuring principle of the frequency protection is based upon an evaluation of the rate of
change of the phase angle for the voltage vector by comparing the actual synchronising
frequency fo, i.e. 1/12 of the with the configured nominal frequency of the protection system.
Hence, according to the relation
= 2 f . t
f is computed to the known sample interval t and the actual measured frequency calculated
as follows.
f1 = f0 + f
For the practical execution of the above described method the connected measured voltage
is sampled 12 times each cycle. To suppress the influence of higher harmonics due to
superimposed power system control signals the measured values are directed to a digital filter
(Thompson low-pass of the 5th order, limiting factor of 1.2 times nominal frequency). Subsequently
via the Fourier Transformation the amplitude and the voltage vector phase position
is determined and the frequency computed according to the above formula whereby for each sample
interval a new a new frequency value is available. The final frequency is computed from
a mean value for a period of 3 cycles (= 36 single values) and when the measured signal is between
the parameter settings minimum amplitude and maximum amplitude the initiating conditions for a
function stage are fulfilled and will be set provided that no blocking signal is present. When the
initiation continues during the whole time delay the corresponding trip output
delivered.
Initiation and at the same time active trip outputs will reset when during 36 consecutive samples, i.e.
3 cycles, the initiating conditions are no longer present (trip output extension).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.5.2
MF311
Application:
The vector shift function is provided as an on-line protection for generators with a relative
small power rating in case of system disturbances, e.g. emanating from a system auto
reclosing or external short circuits. During a system disturbance an instant unloading of a generator
(equivalent to a full load rejection) may occur causing a sudden phase change
of the generator voltage vector. On the other hand the synchronising torque is lost at the
position of the network short circuit and the recurring system voltage after fault clearing can
be asynchronous to the generator voltage whereby the vector shift function is inhibiting a
re-synchronising of the generator to the power system under such conditions.
Please note that the vector shift function is preferably applied for smaller generator ratings
and is basically evaluating the vector shift of the generator voltage due to de-loading of the
machine during system disturbances.
Under special network conditions, i.e. long grading times in conjunction with low rotor inertia
a significant speed increase corresponding to a phase shift may occur during certain types
of system faults. Such a continuous voltage vector angle change should not primarily be the
trip criteria for the vector shift function even though depending on the selected settings a vector
angle shift is indicated. In the extreme case with a relative fast speed increase even possible false
tripping can take place during a load rejection. As a general rule only the original phase
shift happening directly after an auto reclose sequence or a system fault should be taken for
the evaluation. Please note that for large generators, e.g. turbine generator in a nuclear power plant
the influence of a speed rise to the phase angle must be considered all the time. For this
purpose the ELIN out of step protection relay type MSTAB was developed which covers each
and every power system operating condition.
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
With a setting = 1 from this moment on the phase angle configuration has to be exceeded during
12 consecutive samples to initiate a trip output. As indicated the vector shift function is extremely
fast compared with other protective functions and therefore only a trip signal is generated without
any prior initiation.
In praxis this will result in following tripping times:
Setting = 1 cycle:
Internal trip delay = 13 ... 24 samples, typical 20 samples (... corresponding to 33 ms at 50 Hz)
Setting = 2 cycles:
Internal trip delay = 25 ... 36 samples, typical 32 samples (...corresponding to 53 ms at 50 Hz)
EW = 3 Per.:
Internal trip delay = 37 ... 48 samples, typical 44 samples (...corresponding to 73 ms at 50 Hz)
The external tripping time (relay output) is approximately 5 ms longer.
c)
"Blocking V<" Setting:
Generally the function is blocked for very low voltage signals to prevent false tripping when the
excitation is switched off, etc.
A second application may arise that during a rapid increase or decrease of the generator voltage
the Fourier Analyses will compute a phase shift which cannot be neglected and may lead to false
tripping during start-up or shut-down of the generator unit. For this case the "V<" would have to be
set relatively high. Also it has to be considered that during external system disturbances the
generator voltage should not decrease to this setting value to ensure correct function operation
under all conditions.
Note:
When the actual voltage is smaller than the value V min Sync selected in the page0 the function
is blocked due to the absence of the Sync-Bit.
Note:
During a real phase shift of the generator voltage the Fourier evaluation will temporarily compute
a frequency- and amplitude deviation for a maximum of 1 cycle even though the amplitude and
frequency remain constant. This would result in a possible false trip but is being eliminated via
suitable firmware measures.
Note:
Either phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages can be applied to the relay function which
has to be considered when configuring the V< setting.
d)
"Mode" setting:
"Mode" = 1-phase:
At least one of the three voltage inputs has to show a phase shift larger than the setting value
(1 out of 3).
One, two or three input voltages can be applied to the vector shift function. But please note that
also in the single phase mode all 3 voltages are measured but it is sufficient when only one voltage
will show a vector shift.
The "1-phase" mode is under normal operating conditions with symmetrical voltages sufficient.
"Mode" = 3-phase:
All three input voltages have to show a vector shift above the setting value (3 out of 3) and therefore
all 3 voltages have to be connected to the relay.
This mode is recommended to prevent false tripping due to external disturbances, e.g. negative
phase sequence quantities, etc.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Setting = approximately 6.
Setting = approximately10 ... 12.
DID-001-1.02
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
During the on-load checks it has to be tested that when connecting or disconnecting larger
consumer circuits the vector shift function settings will not produce any false trips.
Therefore a vector shift condition should preferably be detected only above a power change of
about 20%. Consequently it is advised that the power regulation of a network node should be
configured to a minimum real power flow of approximately 20 %.
The same applies fort he speed control (real power) and the excitation control (reactive power).
Trip Matrix
Only parallel operation: Trip of the generator CB
System parallel- and island operation: Trip of the HV CB
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
8.5.3
MF112
Frequency Gradient:
Represents the frequency rate of change per time interval in Hz/s.
It has to be noted that the maximum frequency gradient evaluation for the PROCESSING is not a
constant Hz/s value but a percentage value with respect to the frequency.
Evaluated is a maximum number of 22% of frequency changes per second, i.e. for example
by 50Hz a change of 11Hz/s.
The DRS system configuration window for the frequency gradient displays a maximum range
of 0 ... 15 Hz/s and the practical available setting range is, as outlined above, 22% maximum
of the frequency change within a second and therefore as follows:
0 11 Hz/s for 50 Hz systems
0 13 Hz/s for 60 Hz systems
As indicated the recordable frequency change in absolute values is higher for increasing
frequencies and lower for falling ones. This fact should be considered when determining the
the parameter settings especially when very high values of the gradient and larger time delays
are required and preferred.
Accuracy:
Approximately 0.1 Hz/s depending on the evaluation time which should be chosen as long
as possible.
Tripping Direction:
The relay function is operating in either direction for frequency decrease or increase and
therefore it has to be realised that also during a fast recovery to the nominal frequency
a trip sequence may be initiated.
DID-001-1.02
Page 224 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
8.6
DRS
COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
8.6.1
Pre-Commissioning:
First of all the correct external wiring connections have to be verified.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections whereby due to the
particularity of the frequency protection the measuring channel cannot be allocated freely but
is set during the design stage to a fixed synchronising channel.
For the operating value and the time delay the necessary required parameters have to be set
and by defining the permissible minimum and maximum amplitude the RMS effective measuring
range is determined. According to the desired functionality an over- or under function evaluation
is being selected.
The function outputs are to be configured in the LED- and trip matrix according to requirements.
Function tests are preferably performed with the plant out of service and to verify the correct
operation a relay test set with a variable voltage amplitude of, say 0 -150 volts and an adjustable
frequency range is to be connected to the respective input channels.
The signal amplitude is raised to nominal voltage and by de-activating any blocking inputs the
frequency is slowly adjusted to cause operation of the tested stage according to the set direction.
Record the operating and reset values into the commissioning sheets by changing the frequency
accordingly.
Again alter the frequency until the function operates and then reduce the amplitude of the frequency
generator until the protective function resets. Enter the amplitude value into the commissioning
sheets. Now the amplitude should be raised again until the undervoltage interlock
resets and the test result recorded in the commissioning sheets.
During these tests the function indications, alarms and trip signals are to be observed as well as the
frequency values displayed on the menu item Actual Measured Values.
To verify the time delay the operating frequency setting should be shifted by 0.1 Hz and with a
suitable timer the trip delay measured and recorded in the test sheets.
The other frequency stages are checked the same way as outlined above.
Check the trip- and alarm signals as well as the LED indications according to the configured
parameter settings and the circuit diagrams.
The function blocking feature has to be tested for each stage during an active trip signal output
whereby the function stage has to reset when applying the blocking input.
Subsequently check the configured test feature for each stage and the respective protective
function stage has to operate without any external VT signal.
Please note that during this test procedure other protective functions may operate without any
counter measures taken and should be blocked by applying the respective User application of
the DRS System.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
After the tests any possible necessary parameter setting changes have to be restored to
the original service value.
DID-001-1.02
Page 226 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
8.6.2
DRS
MF112
Frequency Gradient:
During secondary pre-commissioning it has to be noted:
a)
The voltage injection with a test set, e.g. Omicron, has to be applied to the Sync-channel of the
DRS Protective System (Sync-channel: Internal DRS synchronising reference channel for the
Fourier Analysis.
b)
The frequency change has to be continuously adjusted during the whole time delay and not in
sudden steps.
Note: Sudden frequency changes are practically not possible due to the generator inertia and
will only conditionally be accepted by the firmware of the protection system. Further it should
be realised that in case of a unique instantaneous frequency change the time delay will not
expire causing only an alarm initiation.
c)
The maximum rate of frequency shift must not be exceeded, i.e. a maximum of 22% frequency
change per second.
d)
The pre-configured and permissible frequency range for the generator and the DRS System must
not be exited during the whole time delay setting.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 228 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
9.1
OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MI . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1038
MI125
50/51
C2,M,L
1037
MI325
50/51
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
1085
MI327
50/51
C2,M,L
1081
MI318
50/51
C2,M
1045
MI119
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Page 230 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
9.2
TECHNICAL DATA
9.2.1
FNNR TYPE
1038
MI125
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
MI125
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Time multiplier stage 1:
Characteristic:
Operating value stage 2:
Definite time delay stage 2:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.2.2
FNNR TYPE
1037
MI325
ANSI
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
MI325
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1 L1
Initiation stage1
Trip stage1 L2
Initiation stage1
Trip stage1 L3
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2 L1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2 L2
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2 L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
DID-001-1.02
Page 232 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1/ phase 1:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 1:
Characteristic/ phase 1:
Operating value stage 1/ phase 2:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 2:
Characteristic/ phase 2:
Operating value stage 1/ phase 3:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 3:
Characteristic/ phase 3:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 1:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 1:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 2:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 2:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 3:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 3:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1085
MI327
ANSI
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
3-phase, 2-stage inverse Definite Minimum Time current function with common outputs.
MI327
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
DID-001-1.02
Page 234 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1/ phase 1:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 1:
Characteristic/ phase 1:
Operating value stage 1/ phase 2:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 2:
Characteristic/ phase 2:
Operating value stage 1/ phase 3:
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 3:
Characteristic/ phase 3:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 1:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 1:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 2:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 2:
Operating value stage 2/ phase 3:
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 3:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.2.3
FNNR TYPE
1081
ANSI
MI318
Application
50/51
C2,M
This is a 3 phase voltage controlled overcurrent protection with an independent time delayed
operating characteristic. In case of a phase to phase voltage drop for the allocated phase
current evaluation the operating current will be proportionally reduced according to the function
characteristic.
MI318
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage L1-L2
Voltage L2-L3
Voltage L3-L1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 5 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Nominal voltage: 70 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Time delay: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 236 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
9.2.4
FNNR TYPE
1045
ANSI
MI119
Application
C2,M
This function protects traction converter units used in railway systems supply against not permissible
power oscillations which cannot be detected by the overcurrent protection.
MI119
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Motor current
DC input: "Fou Evaluation" (from the control system)
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Measuring alarm ("Fou Evaluation ")
Setting Parameters
Oscillations/min: 1 ... 10 Pend./min in 1 Pend./min steps
0.1 ... 1 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Current gradient: 0.05 ... 0.40 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Gradient Fou: 0.1 ... 2 %/s in 0.05 %/s steps
Measuring accuracy: 0.1 ... 5 %/V in 0.02 %/s steps
Voltage at 0 %:: 0.2 ... 4.8 V in 0.005 V steps
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: not applicable since only trip output
Operating time: 2 cycles?
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 238 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
3~
OUT 03
I3
29
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
9.3.1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
9.3
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.3.2 MI318
L1
L2
+ -
L3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
I L1
I L2
OUT 03
I L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 04
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
OUT 11
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
G
3~
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
DESIGN OF GEN.
NEUTRAL POINT: ISOLATED OR
EARTHED VIA
RESISTOR
DRS STANDARD
APPLICATION
USING Uph-ph
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
IN 01
IN 02
IN 03
IN 04
IN 05
IN 06
IN 07
IN 08
X7
OUT 17
OUT 18
OUT 19
OUT 20
OUT 21
OUT 22
OUT 23
OUT 24
X2
4
5
6
7
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MODBUS
OUT 14
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 13
U2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
GEN.
OUT 12
U1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006--
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 240 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 07
OUT 08
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 06
OUT 09
UAKB
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
M
3~
OUT 03
I3
29
ASYNCHRONMOTOR
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.4
9.4.1
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
MI325/ MI327/ MI125
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I L2
1
GEN.
I L3
G
3~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 242 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
3
I L1
tTRIP
PHASE A
STAGE 1
set characteristic Ph.A
set TMS St.1 Ph.A
t = tTRIP
I L2
STAGE 1
IL1 / IL1set
tTRIP
I L3
= TMSSt.1 Ph.A * (K /
((IL1 / IL1 set) ** E - 1))
|IL1| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.A)
PHASE C
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.A
|IL2| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.B)
&
|IL3| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.C)
&
TEST
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
LEDDISPLAY
0
2
BL.
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
>=1
&
&
&
ALARM
ALARM ST.1
ST.1
&
&
&
ALARM
ALARM
ST.1
ALARMST.1
ST.1
TEST
ST.2
TRIP ST.1
ALARM
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
>=1
&
&
&
&
&
&
LEDMATRIX
TRIP ST.1
ALARM
ST.1
ALARM
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BL.
ST.2
ALARM
ST.1
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
>=1
&
&
&
&
&
&
ALARM
ALARM
ST.1
ALARMST.2
ST.1
TRIP ST.2
ALARM
ST.1
>=1
>=1
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
&
&
&
&
&
&
TRIPMATRIX
TRIP ST.2
ALARM
ST.1
ALARM
ST.1
PROCESSING
3
4
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
NOTEBOOK
3
I L1
tTRIP
PHASE A
STAGE 1
set characteristic Ph.A
set TMS St.1 Ph.A
t = tTRIP
I L2
STAGE 1
IL1 / IL1set
tTRIP
I L3
= TMSSt.1 Ph.A * (K /
((IL1 / IL1 set) ** E - 1))
|IL1| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.A)
PHASE C
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.A
|IL2| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.B)
|IL3| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.C)
2
TEST
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
LEDDISPLAY
BL.
ST.1
ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
3
2
&
&
ALARM ST.1
TRIP ST.1
TEST
ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
&
LEDMATRIX
TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
BL.
ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST.2
1
0
TRIP ST.2
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
&
&
TRIPMATRIX
TRIP ST.2
PROCESSING
3
4
MI327 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. WITH PHASE COMMON - OUTPUTS FOR ALL
PHASES LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 9-6
DID-001-1.02
Page 244 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
STAGE 1
1.717,98 sec.
1 2
IL1 / IL1set
IEC Curves
K
E
CHARACTERISTIC
Extremly Inverse
80
2
Very Inverse
13,5 1
Normal Inverse
0,14 0,02
Long Inverse
120 1
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1 per
regular
function
OUTPUT
tTRIP
BIN. I/0
PRESET
where:
tTRIP
TMS
I
Iset
K, E
trip time
time multiplier setting (st.1)
input current
pickups current setpoint
constants (see left!)
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
1000
t[s]
100
TMS = 1,0
O/C-SET VALUE
OF STAGE 2
10
TMS = 0,5
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,01
0.001
1
I/Iset
10
2
2
100
STAGE 1
LONG INVERSE
STAGE 2
DEF. TIME
FORMULA:
/ ((I / Iset) ** 1-1))
tTRIP. = TMS * (120
.
STAGE 2
TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
ALARM OF STAGE 2
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1
SCALE OF AXIS VALID FOR STAGE 1 ONLY!
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
1000
t[s]
100
O/C-SET VALUES
FOR STAGE 2
10
TMS = 1,0
TMS = 0,5
TMS = 0,1
1
0,1
0,01
0.001
1
2
I/Iset
10
STAGE 1
NORMAL INVERSE
STAGE 2
DEF. TIME
FORMULA:
tTRIP = TMS * (0,14 / ((I / IEW) ** 0,02-1))
STAGE 2
TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
WARNUNG STUFE 2
BLOCKIERT AUSLSUNG DER STUFE 1
ACHSENSKALIERUNG NUR FR STUFE 1 GLTIG!
100
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
1000
t[s]
100
10
TMS = 1,0
O/C-SET VALUE
FOR STAGE 2
TMS = 0,5
TMS = 0,1
0,1
1
0,01
0.001
I/IEW
10
ALARM OF STAGE 2
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1
100
STAGE 1
VERY INVERSE
STAGE 2
DEF. TIME
FORMULA:
tTRIP = TMS * (13,5 / ((I / IEW) ** 1-1))
STAGE 2
TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
2
3
DID-001-1.02
Page 248 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
1000
1000
t [s]
t[s]
100
100
10
10
TMS = 1,0
11
TMS = 0,5
O/C-SET VALUE
FOR STAGE 2
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,1
0,01
0,01
1
0,001
0.001
11
I/Iset
10
10
100
100
2
I / Iset
ALARM OF STAGE 2
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1
STAGE 1
EXTREMLY INVERSE
STAGE 2
DEF. TIME
FORMEL:
tTRIP = TMS * (80 / ((I / Iset) ** 2-1))
STAGE 2
TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
2
3
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.4.2
MI318
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I1
I L2
I2
I L3
I3
U1
U L1L2
1
U2
U L2L3
U3
U L3L1
G
3~
GEN.
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
DESIGN OF GEN.
NEUTRAL POINT:
ISOLATED OR
EARTHED VIA RESISTOR
DRS STANDARD
APPLICATION
USING Uph-ph
TEST
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
BLOCKING
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 250 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
CHOOSE
MAX. OF
IL1,IL2,IL3
I > RESTRAINED
SET VALUE
RESTRAINED
SET VALUE
MULTIPLIER
SET VALUE:
NOM.VOLTAGE
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
1,0
0,9
CHOOSE
MIN. OF
UL1L2,UL2L3,UL3L1
0,1
0,1
0,8 1,0
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
BLOCKING
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM
&
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t > tset
1
0
&
TRIP
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MI318 VOLT. RESTRAINED O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 9-13
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI318
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
1
0
MULTIPLIER
VOLTAGE RESTRAINED-CHARACTERISTIC.
1,0
0,9
Uph-ph
Uph-ph nom
0,1
0,8 1,0
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
OUTPUT
0,1
always
1"
CHOOSE
MAX. OF
IL1,IL2,IL3
The maximum current signal is chosen only and used for further computation.
CHOOSE
MIN. OF
UL1,UL2,UL3
The minimum voltage signal is chosen only and used for further computation.
LEDMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 252 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
VOLTAGE RESTRAINED
CHARACTERISTIC
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGE (ACTUAL)
RATED PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGE (SET VALUE)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.4.3 MI119
L1
L2
L3
I L1
M
3~
I1
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
ASYNCHRONMOTOR
TEST
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
BLOCKING
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 254 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
IRMS
IRMSmax
I L1
Calculate RMS
t
1
2
1
2
1
2
IRMSmin
(IL1(RMS)max IL1(RMS)min)
> set value
Oscill. current value
set value
Fou
Calulate
grad Fou
&
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
MEAS. ALARM
1
0
>=1
&
BLOCKING
MEAS. ALARM,
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
=1
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t > tset
1
0
&
TRIP
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 9-17
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI119
CALC. INTERNAL
1
0
FUNCTION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
IRMS
RMSmax
RMSmin
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM
TRIP
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 256 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Explanation:
Gradient Fou
1. Gradient Fou is used for blocking (Grad. Fou > set).
If exeeded: a) Block of TRIP
If exeeded: b) Reset Oscill. Counter to 0 for 10 sec.
Note: Gradient Fou Blocking is retriggerable.
2. Gradient Fou is calculated by the PROCESSING
using the DC input (slow Input / see Input Matrix of the Prot. Function)
and the set values Meas Sens. and Volt. at 0%.
Result of calculation: Gradient Fou
3. Meaning of Gradient F ou:
A changing of the set value for Motor Speed (by Operators) results in changes of the
Motor Speed probably accompanied by oscillations until the new speed is settled.
These oscillations depend on the change rate of the speed setting (speed setting = DC-Input)
resp. the Gradient Fou (= calculated by PROCESSING using the DC input).
Oscillations are more probable with high gradients of fou.. These oscillations are considered
to be normal operation conditions, therefore the tripping is blocked for 10s and the Osc
Counter is resetted to 0 osc.
4. Meas. Sens. [%/s]:
defines how to calculate
the difference of the motor - speed - set value using the Slow Input /DC input) signal.
Note: this input signal is just a speed difference, not a speed gradient! The gradient is calculated
by the PROCESSING.
5. Volt. at 0%: level of the DC input signal at nom speed setting (supplied by plant operators).
Note: corresponds with nom. speed of motor.
6.) Grad. Fou:
time constant for calculation of Fou:
Approx. 1sec.
DC-input = set value for delta Motorspeed
(coming from control room)
+2%
+1%
-1%
grad. Fou
(calculated by VE)
BLOCK
starts
for 10s
BLOCK
starts
for 10s
set of
grad. Fou
oscill. expected/
(= normal
operation)
oscill. expected/
(= normal
operation)
10s
block
10s
block
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
IMOTOR(RMS-value)
max 2
max 1
delta IRMS
min 2
min 1
grad I
1
2
1
2
oscillation
oscillation
delta IRMS
grad I
[ARMS/sec]
during oscillation the change rate (increase or decrease) of the RMS
value of the motorcurrent must exceed the set value Curr. Grad.
Oscil. Counter:
DID-001-1.02
Page 258 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Remark
Oscillations / min
0,3A = 30% In
Curr. Grad
0,12A = 12% In
Gradient Fou
0,7%/s
Meas. Sens.
1,5%/V
Volt. at 0%
2,15V
Input (delta--speed):
0,5V-2,5% speed
2,16Vnom.speed
4,5V+3,5% speed
INPORTANT NOTE:
Input < 0,5VDC or
input > 4,5VDC
results in "Meas Alarm" !
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.5
9.5.1
FUNCTION
MI125/ MI325/ MI327
MI325:
The function performs as 3 single phase relays their settings being completely independent from
each other.
MI327:
Initiation of stage 2 in one phase is blocking the trip of stage1 in the same phase via function internal
measures. However, since the external alarm and trip outputs are common an overcurrent condition
in another phase which is not being blocked may still lead to a tripping
of stage 1.
DID-001-1.02
Page 260 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
9.5.2
DRS
MI318
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
9.5.3
MI119
DID-001-1.02
Page 262 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
and the slow input SI01 measures the frequency setting change initiated by the control system
which is a frequency control and not a speed control command.
For the protective function only the frequency rate of change is considered and when the value
is exceeded then the counter is reset to zero and remains the same for 10 seconds.
It is assumed that short time oscillations are a normal operating condition during large changes
of the frequency control value and must not be considered as an oscillation configured in the
DRS Protection System.
The "gradient Fou" is also be retriggered and the time constant for the computation of the
Degree Fou is actually about 1 second but may be set higher due to some time constants
of the motor which can be between 5 ... 10 s.
Setting Example: 0.7 %/s.
Measuring Sensitivity:
This does not concern the Fou gradient but only the input matrix / SI01:
Target change for the frequency.
The units are in %/V (and not %/s / V).
Setting example (also see below): 1.5 %/V.
Voltage at 0%:
As outlined above.
Setting example:
0.5V corresponds to -2.5 %
4.5V corresponds to +3.5%
Therefore the zero point lies at a voltage of: 2.16V.
The measuring sensitivity fort his example will result in: 1.5 %/V
Explanation of Inputs:
Motor Current:
One selectable phase of the motor current
(asynchronous motor 3-phase, 50 Hz).
DC Input: "Fou Target" coming from the control system:
Speed rate of change for the frequency target by the control station.
Explanation of Outputs:
Trip:
Motor oscillation has been recognised.
Measuring Fault:
Refers to the DC input: "Fou Target" coming from the control system.
This DC signal (SI) should always be between 0.5V DC and 4.5 V DC
even during standstill of the motor otherwise an alarm annunciation
Measuring Fault will be given.
Recommendation: Supervision of the measuring transducer loop, etc.
(transducer failure, wire break, ) with the aid of the DRS-WIN
measured values window display.
Features of the Protective Function:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
The PROCESSING program is counting all oscillations from 0 % of the motor nominal current
onwards,
i.e. the minimum value.
The oscillation counter is evaluating in 0.5 steps (half oscillations). For each half oscillation
following criteria have to be fulfilled:
Oscillation current amplitude >
Current gradient >
Gradient Fou <.
For each half oscillation the 1st minute window is starting to run separately. After expiry of this
period the corresponding half oscillation is deducted from the counter values and if no other
subsequent oscillations are taking place it can be observed that the counter will slowly tend to
zero (except there was a trip then the counter is immediately reset).
The oscillation counter is only adding when during an oscillation the RMS current differential
value is exceeding the set oscillation current amplitude whereby the reference point will be the
last measured current minimum or current maximum. The oscillation or half oscillation can either
start from the + or - direction.
Applying the blocking- ort he test input will reset the oscillation counter to 0.
DID-001-1.02
Page 264 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
9.6
COMMISSIONING
!!! Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!!!
9.6.1
9.6.2
MI318
9.6.3
MI119
-Secondary Tests:
With a suitable test set inject a variable single phase current according to the characteristic
(please also refer to Item "Function MI119"):
Inputs
Analogue: Motor current
DC input: "Fou Target" (from control system)
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Note:
By simultaneous varying of the DC input "Fou Target " a reset of the oscillation counter is achieved.
After resetting the counter to "0" the relay function will remain blocked for 10 s,
i.e. the counter will remain at zero during the next 10 seconds.
Note:
When on the "Fou Target" DC input there is no signal present the function will produce a
"Measuring Fault" alarm:
This DC signal (SI) should always be between 0.5V DC and 4.5 V DC
even during standstill of the motor otherwise an alarm annunciation
Measuring Fault will be given.
Check of the displayed function computed values:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 266 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
10.1 OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MI . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1005
MI111
50/51
C2,M,L
1047
MI112
50/51
C2,M,L
1007
MI121
50/51
C2,M,L
1049
MI122
50/51
C2,M,L
1004
MI311
50/51
C2,M
1046
MI312
50/51
C2,M
1055
MI313
50/51
C2,M,L
1056
MI314
50/51
C2,M,L
1006
MI321
50/51
C2,M
1048
MI322
50/51
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
1052
MI323
50/51
C2,M,L
1054
MI324
50/51
C2,M,L;
VE1,PROC
ESSING
1061
MI326
50/51
C2,M,L
1091
MI113
50
C2,M
1050
MI120
50/51
C2,M
1039
MI132
50/51
C2,M,L
1060
MI133
50/51
C2,M,L
1031
MI332
50/51
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Page 268 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1005
MI111
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1047
MI112
ANSI
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 15 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 270 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1007
MI121
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
1 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 2 stage,
1-15A/ 1-50A
1049
MI122
50/51
C2,M,L
1 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI122
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 272 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1004
ANSI
MI311
50/51
Application
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, separate
outputs.
MI311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation phase L1
Trip phase L1
Initiation phase L2
Trip phase L2
Initiation phase L3
Trip phase L3
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1046
ANSI
MI312
Application
50/51
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 15 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 274 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1055
ANSI
MI313
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, common
outputs.
MI313
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1056
ANSI
MI314
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, common
outputs.
MI134
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 15 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 276 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1006
MI321
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, separate
outputs.
MI321
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1048
ANSI
MI322
Application
50/51
C2,M
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, separate
outputs.
MI322
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 L1
Trip stage1 L1
Initiation stage 1 L2
Trip stage 1 L2
Initiation stage 1 L3
Trip stage 1 L3
Initiation stage 2 L1
Trip stage 2 L1
Initiation stage 2 L2
Trip stage 2 L2
Initiation stage 2 L3
Trip stage 2 L3
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Operating value:
Operating time:
Type:
DID-001-1.02
Page 278 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1052
ANSI
MI323
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection,
common outputs.
MI323
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Operating value:
Operating time:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 280 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
MI326
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Operating value:
Operating time:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1054
ANSI
MI324
Application
50/51
C2,M,L
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, common
outputs.
MI324
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Operating value:
Operating time:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 282 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1091
ANSI
MI113
Application
50
C2,M
1 phase, 1 stage fast overcurrent definite time delay function (DT) with instantaneous actual
value computation.
MI113
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.1 ... 15 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Reset delay: 0.1 ... 0.5 s in 0.01 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: Not applicable since no time delay
Operating time: 10 ms including relay outputs
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1050
MI120
ANSI
Application
50/51
C2,M
2 stage definite time DC current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI120
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input for current [0 ... 5 V]
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Measuring accuracy:
Voltage at 0 Amps:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 284 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1039
MI132
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
MI132
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage (in phase with current)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Operating value stage 3:
Operating time stage 3:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 286 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1060
MI133
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
1 phase, 3 stage directional overcurrent function (DT) with extended time delay for stage 1.
For single phase systems, respectively double phase systems, i.e. railway traction application.
MI133
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage (in phase with current)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Operating value stage 3:
Operating time stage 3:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 288 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1031
MI332
ANSI
50/51
Application
C2,M,L
MI332
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Operating value stage 3:
Operating time stage 3:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 290 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
10.3.1 MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/
MI326
+ L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
1
2
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
+
+
+
+
-
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 03
I3
29
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
10.3.2 MI120
+ L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I L1
4...20mA DC
MEAS. TRANSDUCER
...A AC mA DC
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
+
+
+
+
-
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 292 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
L1
X1
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
OUT 08
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
I7
UAKB
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 07
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 05
I6
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 04
OUT 09
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LEGEND:
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I8
29
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
OUT 03
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
10.3.4 MI132
+ -
T
X1
DIR. 1 *)
IR
GEN.
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I2
G
2~
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
future use (hardware extension)
IEC870 5-103 control system interface
chain line data interface
control system interface
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 03
I3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U R-T
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
7
8
9
I1
29
U R-T
*) DEFINITION
DIR. DIR.2
SEE DRAWING
DEF. OF DIR
1A
5A
OPTIONAL MODULE
IR
4
5
6
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
MAIN
TRANSF.
1A
5A
UAKB
IR
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 294 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
L3
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
IL1
DIR. 1 *)
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
U L2L3
UL1L2
U L3L1
G
3~
GEN.
*) DEFINITION
DIR.1 DIR.2
SEE DRAWING
DEF. OF DIR
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NOTE:
SEQU. OF PHASES: L1 L2 L3
(PHASE ROTATION: RIGHT)
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L1L2
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
IL3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
IL2
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
IL1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
PROCESSING
I L2
I L3
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
51 Alarm
51 Trip
DID-001-1.02
Page 296 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
set value:
I L1
I L2
I L3
1
1
Type =
OVERDETECTION
Type =
UNDERDETECTION
L1
ALARM
STAGE 1
PH. L1
PH. L2
>=1
PH. L3
ALARM
STAGE 2
PH. L1
PH. L2
PH. L3
>=1
L2
TEST ST.1
L3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
ALARM ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.1
>=1
TEST ST.2
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
FUNCTION
&
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.2
1
0
1
NUMBER OF PHASES
DEPENDS ON TYPE OF RELAY.
(SEE LIST OF MODELS ON
LOGIC DIAGRAM)
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
SHOWN:
3-PH. RELAY WITH
SUMMED UP OUTPUTS.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI111...MI326
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Type =
OVERDETECTION
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
Type =
UNDERDETECTION
(|FFT 1.H.| of IL1 ) > (set value
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
MI326
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 298 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
L1
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
50 ALARM
50 TRIP
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
RMS-VALUE
t
CALIBRATION IS OPTIMIZED FOR 16 2/3Hz - CURRENTS (SINE WAVE). AT 50Hz - SIGNALS THE
ACCURACY IS STILL BETTER 3%.
I
set value
t
OVERSAMPLINGRATE IS CONSTANT
(NOT DEPENDING
ON FREQUENCY OF
CURRENT)
FREQUENCY OF
CURRENT 16 2/3...60 Hz
set value
90
5ms
5ms
180
SINE WAVE TO
START ABOVE SAMPLES OUTPUT
RELAY
set
IN ORDER TO
GET CORRECT
TRIP TIME
(=10ms)
DID-001-1.02
Page 300 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
OVERSAMPLING
(INSTANTANEOUS VALUES)
PROCESSINGINTERNAL DC-OFFSET
CORRECTION
I > Iset
I
set
5ms 5ms
TEST
DETECTION
OF I >
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
OUTPUT
RELAY
BLOCKING
TRIP
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
&
TRIP
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
OVERSAMPLING
(INSTANTANEOUS
VALUES)
PROCESSING-INTERNAL
DC-OFFSET CORRECTION
I > Iset
I
set
5ms 5ms
DETECTION OUTPUT
RELAY
OF I >
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
DID-001-1.02
Page 302 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
2
1A AC
resp.
5A AC
4...20mA DC
resp.
0...20mA DC
MEAS. TRANSDUCER
...A AC mA DC
4
5
6
EURAX.
MEAS.
TRANSDUCER
1...5V DC
resp.
0...5V DC
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CB1
CB2
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
1 2 3 4 5
SETTING RANGES:
EXAMPLE: 1:
2:
3:
4:
C.T. nom
required primary
current range
0...0,4A AC
EURAX
Input
C.T. = 1A nom
C.T. = 1A nom
C.T. = 1A nom
C.T. = 5A nom
0...0,4A AC
0...40A AC
0...50A AC
0...200A AC
4...20mAC
4...20mAC
0...20mAC
4...20mAAC
EURAX
Output
set value
Meas.
Sensitivity
set value
Voltage at
0 Ampere
0,1A/V
10A/V
10A/V
50A/V
1V
1V
0V
1V
1...5V DC
1...5V DC
0...5V DC
1...5V DC
No LIFE ZERO
(no supervision of
meas. transducer
circuit possible)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
NOTEBOOK
DC
EURAX
MEAS.
TRANSDUCER
(positioned
inside DRS
COMPACT)
1...5V DC
I L1
resp.
0...5V DC
(SI03)
set value
TYPE
set value
MEAS. SENSITIVITY
set value
VOLTAGE AT 0 AMPERE
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TEST ST.2
ALARM ST.1
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
1
0
BLOCK. ST.2
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 304 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI120
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
set value
TYPE
set value
MEAS. SENSITIVITY
set value
VOLTAGE AT 0 AMPERE
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
..
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
MI120/ OPTION
SUPERVISION OF MEAS. TRANSDUCER-CIRCUIT
FOR MI120
Applicable only if chosen: 4...20mA (= 1...5V DC)
[NOTE: 0...20mA no supervision possible!]
Supervision principle:
Min. input voltage = 1V DC (regular operation).
If <1V DC
malfunction of meas. transducer circuit.
SI03
(Slow input 03)
1...5V DC
corresp. with
0...40A
(for example)
MI 120
IL1> or IL1<
PROT. RELAY
DIG. OUT
ALARM TRIP
OPTIONAL:
BLK!
OPTIONAL:
2
MU 120
Undervoltage DC
check: UDC < 1V
WARNING
Meas. transducer circuit
is faulty!
LOGICFUNCTION 2
DIG. OUT
WARNING
LEGEND:
1
DID-001-1.02
Page 306 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
MAIN
TRANSF.
DIR. 1
IR
U R-T
GEN.
G
2~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.3
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
BLOCK. ST.3
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
51 Alarm
51 Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ANGLE (IR, UR-T)
NOTEBOOK
IR
UR-T
DIR.1
IR
U R-T
(IR ,UR-T)
DIR.2
&
&
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.2
TEST
ST.1
1
0
BL.
ST.1
ALARM ST.3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
BL.
ST.3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
>=1
&
ALARM ST.2
&
TRIP
ST.2
&
TRIP ST.2
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.3
&
ALARM ST.3
&
TRIP ST.3
FUNCTION
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.2
&
1
0
&
TRIP ST.2
TEST
ST.3
TRIP
ST.1
LEDDISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
&
1
0
BL.
ST.2
&
TRIP ST.1
TEST
ST.2
ALARM ST.1
&
TRIP
ST.3
&
TRIPMATRIX
TRIP ST.3
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 10-18
DID-001-1.02
Page 308 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
UR-T
IR
(IR ,UR-T)
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DIR.2
TRIPMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
DIR.1
LEDMATRIX
always
1"
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.1
>
<
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 10-19
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
R
THEORY:
MAIN
TRANSF.
PHASORS TAKEN
FROM DIAGRAM:
R
DIR. 1 DIR. 2
UR
UT
EARTH
UR-T
ROTATE PHASORS
DIAGRAM 180C:
PHASE R
UR
IT
IR
MOVE VOLT.
PHASORS:
UR-T
UR-T
UR
UT
UT
GEN.
UR
G
2~
This point
is NOT
EARTH-POT.
PHASE T
This point
is NOT
PHASE T-POT.
UR = UR - 0 = UR
UR-T = UR - UT
DIRECTION 1:
IR
UR-T
UT
IT
UR
IR
UT
IT
UR
IT
UT
IR
G
2~
DIRECTION 2:
IR
UR-T
IT
G
2~
DID-001-1.02
Page 310 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
RELATION:
L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
IR
UR
UR-T
UR-T
IR
j
UR-T
IR
(IR, UR-T)
IT
IT
G
2~
GEN.
UT
FORMULA:
UR-T = UR - UT
1
2
DRS-COMPACT2A
=0
DEF. OF:
DIR.1
DIR.2
=+10
IN
A D
(I NG ICA
N R , U LE TE
O
D
SC TE R-T )
.
R BO ON
EE O
N K
REF
j=+10
j=0
P
AN HA
(I GL SE
E
R,
U j
R)
=+80
IR G- UR-T
G+
DIR.1
j=+80 IR
G-
M+
j=-100
IR
DIR.2
MM+
=-100
IR
LEGEND:
j=+190
G+ ... GEN.OPER./
OVEREXC.
G- ... GEN.OPER./
UNDEREXC.
M+ ... MOTOR OPER./
OVEREXC.
M- ... MOTOR OPER./
UNDEREXC.
=+190
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DEF. OF RANGES OF DIR.1/ DIR.2
Fig. 10-21
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
R
L3
T
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
SHOWN: DIR.1
UR
DIR. 1
UR-T
IR
IR
IR
I1
U R-T
U1
UR-T
IR
GEN.
IT
UT
G
2~
IR
IT
DRS-COMPACT2/
DRS FAULT RECORD
t
UR-T
t
1
Note: DRS-COMPACT1
CURRENT INVERSED.
DRS MOD.:
SAME AS DRS-COMPACT2.
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DRS FAULT RECORD / DEF. OF SIGN
Fig. 10-22
DID-001-1.02
Page 312 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I1
I L2
I2
I L3
I3
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
DIR. 1
U1
U L1L2
U2
U L2L3
U3
U L3L1
GEN.
G
3~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.3
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
BLOCK. ST.3
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
67 Alarm
67 Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ANGLE SYSTEM1
ANGLE SYSTEM2
ANGLE SYSTEM3
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
SYSTEM1
IL1
DIR.1 *)
&
UL2L3
DIR.2 *)
(IL1 ,UL2L3)
&
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.2
ALARM ST.3
UL3L1
DIR.1
DIR.2
(IL2 ,UL3L1)
IL2
&
ALARM ST.1
&
ALARM ST.2
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
ALARM ST.3
UL1L2
DIR.1
&
DIR.2
(IL3 ,UL1L2)
IL3
TEST
ST.1
*) SEE DRAWG.
DEF. OF
RANGES OF
DIR.1/DIR.2
&
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.3
1
0
BL.
ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
>=1
TEST
ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
>=1
TEST
ST.3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BL.
ST.3
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
&
&
TRIP
ST.1
&
>=1
>=1
OUTPUT
1
0
&
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.2
&
ALARM ST.2
TRIP
ST.2
&
&
TRIP ST.2
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.3
ALARM ST.3
&
TRIP ST.3
LEDDISPLAY
&
FUNCTION
PROCESSING
ALARM ST.1
TRIP ST.2
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TRIP ST.1
1
0
BL.
ST.2
>=1
&
TRIP
ST.3
&
TRIPMATRIX
TRIP ST.3
DID-001-1.02
Page 314 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI332
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
IL1
UL2L3
SYSTEM1
1
(IL1 ,UL2L3)
DIR.1
DIR.2
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
1=
SYSTEM1:
SYSTEM2:
SYSTEM3:
1=
2=
-10...+100
+170...+280
(-80)
3=
2=
3=
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
j1 =
corresponds with j 2 =
j3 =
j1 =
corresponds with j 2 =
j3 =
LEDDISPLAY
-100...+10
+80...+190
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.1
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
THEORY:
MAIN
TRANSF.
PHASORS TAKEN
FROM DRAWING:
UL3L1
GEN.
IL2
EARTH
POTENTIAL L1
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
ROTATE PHASORS
DIAGRAM 180C:
PHASE L1
POTENTIAL
UL1L2 UL2L3
DIR. 1 DIR. 2
MOVE PHASE
VOLT. PHASORS:
UL3L1
UL3
IL3
L3
UL1
UL2
UL2L3
UL1L2
UL2
UL3
UL3L1
UL3
UL1
UL1L2
UL2
L2
UL1
UL2L3
This point is NOT
PHASE L3-POT.
G
3~
DIRECTION 1:
UL1L2
IL1
UL1
IL1
DIRECTION 2:
UL1L2
G
3~
GEN.
UL1L2
UL1
IL1
UL1L2
GEN.
G
3~
IL1
DID-001-1.02
Page 316 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
VECTOR GRAPHICS
DEFINITION:
L1
RELATION:
L2
L3
IL1
MAIN
TRANSF.
IL1
IL1
UL3L1
UL1L2
IL3
GEN.
ANGLE SYSTEM1
(MEASURED)
UL2L3
UL1
IL2
UL2L3
IL2
UL1L2
IL1
(IL1, UL2L3)
IL3
SYSTEM1
SYSTEM2
G
3~
(INDICATED
SYSTEM3
(UL1/ IL1)
(IL1,UL2L3)
EXAMPLE:
GEN.NOM.OPER.
POWER FACTOR = 1
ANGLE INDICATED: 90
=0
=+90
DRS-COMPACT2
=+100
LE
AN
IN
D
IC
AT
ED
N
O UL2
T
SC EB L3 ) O .
O
N
R
EE OK
N
(I
L1
,
P
AN HA
G SE
L
L1
,U E
L1
)
IL1
UL1
G-
G+
DIR.1
(I
=+170
=+80
REF
=+10 =0
IL1
G-
M+
=-100
IL1
DIR.2
MM+
=-10
IL1
=+190
LEGEND:
G+
GM+
M=+280(=-80)
... GEN.OPER./OVEREXC.
... GEN.OPER./UNDEREXC.
... MOTOR OPER./OVEREXC.
... MOTOR OPER./UNDEREXC.
ANGLE INDICATED ON
NOTBOOK SCREEN
PHASE ANGLE (UG,IG)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
SHOWN: DIR.1
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
DIR. 1
IL2
IL1
I1
I L2
I2
I L3
I3
IL1
UL2L3
SYSTEM2:
UL3L1
IL3
UL1L2
GEN.
I L1
SYSTEM1:
U L1L2
U1
U L2L3
U2
U L3L1
U3
IL2
SYSTEM3:
UL1L2
G
3~
IL3
SEQU. OF PHASES: L1 L2 L3
IL1
DRS-COMPACT2/
DRS FAULT RECORD
UL2L3
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DRS FAULT RECORD / DEF. OF SIGN
Fig. 10-28
DID-001-1.02
Page 318 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
10.5 FUNCTION
10.5.1 MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/
MI326/ MI132/ MI133/ MI332
Over- and undercurrent DT protection is applied where a defined time delayed disconnection of the
protected plant is required when the setting limits are exceeded or reaching below the limit.
Besides the simple current applications the use, for example, as generator winding short circuit
protection of generators is also the scope of this function.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. Out of this the amplitude
of the fundamental harmonic for each phase is determined according to the standard algorithm
(Fourier Transformation).
At each sample interval the computed amplitude value is checked regarding the initiation conditions,
i.e. the set operating value being either in the over- or under detection mode.
If the initiating conditions are fulfilled during 24 consecutive intervals (2 cycles) the function
is started and the time delay initiated. After expiry of the configured time delay a trip signal
will be produced whereby the delay is according to the DT characteristic independent of the
input signal amplitude.
Initiation and at the same time any trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive sample intervals
(3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled, i.e. the DRS System trip
signal extension feature.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
10.5.2 MI113
The fast overcurrent function MI113 without any adjustable time delay has a tripping time of a typical
10 ms including the output relays whereby about 5 ms are required for the input signal evaluation
and the remaining 5 ms represent the operating time of the output relays.
This trip time is independent from the current frequency and the PROCESSING Basis Sample Rate
because
for the function an own oversampling algorithm is applicable.
Caution: This function must only be conditionally used with other functions and has not to be
combined with frequency functions due to possible frequency jitter!
Generally valid: Do not combine with functions using higher harmonics. Due to the sampling jitters
which are created in conjunction with the oversampling mode it will result into a tolerance range of
the Fourier evaluation.
Should a combination with such functions be absolutely necessary then in each particular case the
correct response of all functions involved has to be thoroughly tested whereby MI113 is always
active.
Further, it has to be realised that this function is using up to 40% of the processor resources due
to the oversampling mode.
The preferred applications are traditionally the 16 2/3 Hz traction systems where the operating
times for normal overcurrent functions are relatively large (typical 2 cycles).
Also for 50 Hz systems the function MI113 is operating within half a cycle which is why the usual
Fourier Algorithm cannot be applied. Therefore MI113 is using a special oversampling algorithm.
The measured values processing is based on the instantaneous values which requires a very
extensive interference signal eliminating routine since the filter effect of the Fourier Analyses is
not available for this function.
When checking the tripping time during secondary injection tests it has to be noted that the current
sinus wave should be starting by 90 otherwise it will take another few milliseconds
until the setting value is approached (Note: instantaneous values are considered!).
The current setting (see "Operating Value") is regarded as an RMS value, respectively is
calibrated as an RMS value. The instantaneous measured values are function-internally converted
into RMS values and then compared with the setting configuration.
This conversion is exactly correct by 16 2/3 Hz at 50 % the deviation is about 3 %. During tests
correlation can easily be verified with the aid of the DRSWIN measured values window
(Note: this window shows in principle the 1st harmonic of the Fourier analyses converted to
the RMS value).
Summary: Even though this function is evaluating the instantaneous values the setting is still
be given as a RMS value.
"Reset Delay" setting:
During zero crossings of the current sinus wave the instantaneous values are tending to zero
whereby especially for 16 2/3 Hz systems a chatter of the trip output may occur but the parameter
reset delay will overcome this time margin.
Offset compensation:
Due to internal device tolerances an additional offset for the measured current input signal can
be possible. Since contrary to the Fourier algorithm the extreme short operating time is incorporated
into the computation result it is necessary to perform a compensation for this. The latter is done
automatically and on a digital basis.
The offset compensation will remain the same when sending new setting data to the DRS.
However in case of auxiliary supply interruptions for the DRS-COMPACT it is necessary to
adjust the offset again which will only take about 1 ... 5 s after which the function MI113 is
in full service conditions.
Result: By the offset compensation it is ensured that even for small settings an over-reaction
of the function will not happen.
DID-001-1.02
Page 320 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
!!! Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!!!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external wiring connections have to be verified.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections.
The parameter settings fort he operating value and time delay have to be configured to the
determined values ( Time Grading).
The relay outputs are to be configured in the LED matrix and the trip matrix according to
requirements.
Function tests by secondary injection are preferably performed with the primary plant out
of service.
With a test set inject a current into the CT input of, e.g. phase L1 and slowly regulate the
current until the function operates.
Note the operating value in the commissioning test sheets.
Adjust the test current into the opposite direction until the function resets and enter the value
into the commissioning test sheets.
Please also compare the external input quantities with the internal measured values on the
window display of the DRS User program.
Apply the same procedures for the other phases and/or stages and record the test results into
the commissioning test sheets.
Observe the trip and alarm signals, respectively the LED indications according to the parameter
settings and the circuit diagrams.
Check the operating time at 1.5 times the setting for each phase and stage with a suitable
timer and enter the results into the test sheets.
Check the configured function blocks for each stage by applying the blocking signal when the
protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test feature for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external current input.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 322 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
11 ML... OVERLOAD
11.1 OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: ML . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1013
ML121
49
C2,M,L
1012
ML321
49
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1013
ML121
ANSI
49
Application
C2,M,L
1 phase overload function with an I t characteristic with consideration of the cooling medium
temperature provided with an alarm- and trip stage. Depending on the selected operating
performance of the overload protection (relative- or absolute value measuring) the adjustable
temperature settings in the DRS menu for the function are either configured as percentage
values of the temperature limit in % or as absolute temperature values in degrees.
ML121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current of protected object
DC input "cooling media temperature"
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Heating/cooling (0/1)
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Measuring fault
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation:
Formula:
Generator nominal current = CT ratio
compensation x
relay nominal current
Pre-loading:
Note: Pre-loading with reference to the
over temperature limit
Heating time constant:
Cooling time constant:
Temperature limit:
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Temperature pre-set:
Note :If applicable
Temperature pre-set:
Note :If applicable
Gradient:
Note :If applicable
Voltage at 0 degrees:
Note :If applicable
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1012
ML321
ANSI
49
Application
C2,M,L
3 phase overload function with an I t characteristic with consideration of the cooling medium
temperature provided with an alarm- and trip stage. Depending on the selected operating
performance of the overload protection (relative- or absolute value measuring) the adjustable
temperature settings in the DRS menu for the function are either configured as percentage
values of the temperature limit in % or as absolute temperature values in degrees.
Ml321
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
DC input "cooling media temperature"
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Heating/cooling (0/1)
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Measuring fault
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation:
Formula:
Generator nominal current = CT ratio
compensation x
relay nominal current
Pre-loading:
Note: Pre-loading with reference to the
over temperature limit
Heating time constant:
Cooling time constant:
Temperature limit:
DID-001-1.02
Page 326 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Temperature pre-set:
Note :If applicable
Temperature pre-set:
Note :If applicable
Gradient:
Note :If applicable
Voltage at 0 degrees:
Note :If applicable
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
TEST (opt.)
BLOCKING (opt.)
HEATING/COOLING (opt.)
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
+
-
LEGEND:
1 Measuring transducer
2
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
OUT 06
OUT 09
OPTIONAL MODULE
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Temp. sensor
resp. meas.
transducer
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
29
PROTECTED
OBJECT
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 328 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I L1
I L2
ANALOG
INPUTS
(CURR.)
I L3
PROTECTED
OBJECT
TEMP.
[mA]
[O]
EURAX
ANALOG
SLOW INPUT 03
(TEMP. OF
COOLANT)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
3
HEATING/COOLING
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
HEATING operation of
protected object
COOLING no operation of
protected object
CB1
CB2
Alarm
Trip
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LOADING [C]
(ABSOLUTE TEMP. OF PROT. OBJECT)
NOTEBOOK
3
IL1
IL2
IL3
IL1
LOAD SETTING
STARTING
POINT
IL2
LOAD SETTING
IL3
LOAD SETTING
set value 4
THERMAL LIMIT
(NOM. OPERATION)
PRELOADING 3
set value
PRELOADING
TEMP. PRESET 2
TIME [sec]
L1
L2
L3
LOADING PH. L1
MEAS.
PRESET
COOLING
MED. TEMP.
LOADING PH. L2
LOADING PH. L3
1...4,75V DC
(SI03)
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
CHOOSE
max. of
(LOADING L1/L2/L3)
1
0
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TEMP.
HEATING/
COOLING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
COOLING
HEATING
TIME
CONST.
TIME
CONST.
TIME
&
&
FUNCTION
1
0
TIME
ALARM
>=1
OUTPUT
LEDDISPLAY
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
TRIP
>=1
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
TRIP
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
LEGEND:
1 (TRANSF. NOM. CURRENT) = (LOAD SETTING) x (RELAY NOM. CURRENT)
2 This PRESET value to be used if no measuring input or if TEMP. SENSING CIRCUIT is faulty (input signals (>4,75V DC) or (<1V DC))
3 PRELOADING-set value is given as [%] of THERMAL LIMIT-set value.
4 THERMAL LIMIT-set value is an overtemperature [C]
5 COOLING MED. TEMP.-set value is an absolute temp. value [C] (see also MEAS. TRANSDUCER)
DID-001-1.02
Page 330 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
IL1
LOAD SETTING
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
LED-indications of
PROCESSING-board
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
nom. LOADING
(@ transformer
nom. current)
final temp.
depending
on IL1
TRIP TEMP.
ALARM TEMP.
LOADING 4
starting point
set value 3
PRELOADING [%]
set value 1
THERMAL LIMIT [C]
( max. permissible temp. rise
caused by current of protected object)
set value 2
TEMP. PRESET [C]
TIME [sec]
Heating time
constant 6
1
PRELOADING... applies if the protection is reset or if the aux. supply was interupted. In this case the
LOADING is resetted too. For safety reason the set value PRELOADING was added in order to cope
with an already loaded (hot) protected object. Should be set according to the LOADING of an average
(typical) operation condition. PRELOADING will lose its influence after approx. 3 time constants.
>>starting point<< after reset or power up of the prot. relay the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE-window
will show the calculated LOADING-value which depends on the actual coolant temp. resp.
TEMP. PRESET-set value and on the PRELOADING-set value.
LOAD SETTING... ratio comp. for c.t. FORMULA: ITransf. nom. = LOAD SETTING x IRelay nom.
HEATING TIME CONSTANT... thermal time constant (during operation of protected object)
COOLING TIME CONSTANT... thermal time constant (protected object is switched OFF)
Note: in order to use the COOLING TIME CONSTANT-feature the dig input HEATING/ COOLING
must be wired!
ALARM TEMP./ OPER. TEMP... Alarm/ Trip. These set values correlate with the indicated temp. value on
the notebook screen (see INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE-window).
DID-001-1.02
Page 332 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
z2
10
z4
12
d2
14
d4
SI03
IN09
OUT 22
OUT 23
OUT 24
100%
SI03
IN09
eIU124
FRONTSIDE
MODBUS
100%
X2
4
5
6
7
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
0%
+
0%
DC CURRENT [4...20mA,...]
or DC VOLTAGE [1...5V DC,...]
EURAX
PT100
REMOTE TEMP.
DETECTOR
IN 08
eIEGL23
THERMO
COUPLER
15 +
16 X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
11
12
13
14
15
16
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
RS 232
X10
LEGEND:
1
Meas. transducer type EURAX 604; used to connect the temp. signal to the
PROT. RELAY CPU (=PROCESSING) via SI03 (Slow Input 03)
IN09: Temp. sensing circuit is faulty.
Note 1: IN9 is an internal input only, not wired to external terminals.
Note 2: not used for ML321 usually. ML321 has an integrated software supervision
(see trip matrix inputs!) for detection of temp. sensing circuit faults (broken wire,
shortcircuit, supply fail,...)
Meas. transducer type EURAX 604 is programable. Type of input signal can be
chosen. Output signal = 1...5V DC.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
time
1 time constant
4. COOLING TIME CONST.
Depends on cooling conditions when protected object not in operation. If unequal to (3.)
then it is also necessary to wire the digital input HEATING/COOLING.
5. THERMAL LIMIT
Amount of temp. rise based on nom. current assuming no PRELOADING and assuming
COOLING MED. TEMP. = 0
6. ALARM TEMP.
Corresponds with the indicated temp. on notebook screen (LOADING) please open
the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE- window (DRSWIN). Example: set = 105deg. (nom = 100deg.)
7. OPER. TEMP. (TRIP TEMPERATURE)
Corresponds with the indicated temp. on notebook screen (LOADING) please open
the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE- window (DRSWIN). Example: set = 115deg.
8. COOLING MED. TEMP
If not measured set = preset
If measured set = measured
9. TEMP. PRESET
Applies only if the cooling temp is not measured (or if malfunction of meas. transducer).
Corresponds with temp. of coolant (during normal operation). Example: set = 40deg.
10. MEAS. SENSITIVITY / GRADIENT / VOLT AT 0DEG.
Applies only if coolant temp. is measured (via meas. transducer).
Example: coolant temperature range = -40deg. ... +110deg.
1V DC...4,75V DC (output of meas. transducer) SLOW INPUT SI03 of VE2
MEAS. SENSITIVITY set = 25mV/deg.
GRADIENT set = positive
VOLTAGE AT 0 DEG. set = 2V
Coolant temp.:
-40deg.
+110deg.
0deg.
+4,75V DC
+2V DC
Conversion:
1deg. 25mV.
DID-001-1.02
Page 334 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
11.5 FUNCTION
Overload
Overload functions are applied to monitor the protected object against not permissible over heating
in case of sustained overload conditions whereby the temperature rise is an exact
thermal image of the protected plant and when exceeding the configured value an alarmand trip output will be initiated.
By a simplified model the heating of load current flow through a winding is according to
following relation:
(t ) = Limit
Thereby is
I 0
1 e E
(1)
When also considering the temperature of the cooling medium TCM then following relation
for the absolute temperature T(t) at time t after commencing load current is according to
following formula:
T (t ) = TCM + Limit
I 0
1 e E
(2)
By similar considerations the cooling of the winding at zero current this formula applies
(t ) = 0 .e
t
A
(3)
(t ) .... Temperature of the winding after time t with zero load current
0 ...... Temperature of the winding when switching to zero current
A ....... Thermal cooling time constant of the winding
With consideration of the cooling medium temperature TCM for the absolute
temperature T(t) at time t after switching off there is following relation:
T(t ) = TKM + 0 .e
t
A
(4)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
The heating- and cooling time constants can vary for several reasons, e.g. no cooling water
circulation, no ventilation, etc.
For the application of the thermal overload protection there are basically 2 different operating
modes possible. On one hand the usual evaluation know for many protection relays which are
matching the relative heating of the protected object is applicable (relative measuring) and on
the other hand with the additional inputs of measuring elements or the known cooling medium
temperature an absolute measurement of the heating conditions of the monitored machinery
is obtained by the DRS function.
Relative Measuring:
This method relies on the fact that after approximately 3 to 4 time constants the limit of the
permissible temperature has been reached and a stationary heating of the machine is
established when operating with nominal current.
Different cooling conditions are not considered in this mode and therefore formulas (1) and
(3) apply. All function settings are this way to be considered as a relative configuration
regarding the permissible temperature limit selectable between 1% and 100%.
Absolute Measuring:
For practical considerations the cooling of the machine has a definite influence on the
heating process. Therefore, e.g. in case of transformer windings, the absolute temperature
evaluation via suitable transducers or additional thermal image load current heating (oil
pocket) is obtained by adding these quantities to the load current temperature rise.
Thus the temperature computed by the I t values plus the added cooling medium
temperature is representing the absolute temperature of the winding according to formulas
(2) and (4). For this method the function setting is to be entered in degrees.
To evaluate the load current heating the function current signals are sampled 12 times each cycle.
By squaring and averaging the RMS value of the signal is determined and aligned with
the CT ratio compensation I0/In (I0 = secondary rated current, In = function nominal current).
With a simple differential equation the derived temperature rise after each time interval t
on the basis of the measured current as well as from the previous temperature value samples
is illustrated in the formula below and calculated as follows.
2
Ia
1
= Limit a t
E
I0
(5)
When the computed temperature is exceeding the trigger value of the temperature alarm setting
an appropriate annunciation is initiated and by a further temperature increase eventually a trip
output is given when the tripping temperature is reached. The tripping time ta during stationary
operating conditions, i.e. no current change during the measuring time, with the set temperature trip
value TTr is according to following formula:
DID-001-1.02
Page 336 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
t a = E .ln
I
Io
1
TTr TKM I0 2
.
1 Grenz I
(6)
The alarm and any possible trip outputs will reset when during 36 consecutive sample
intervals (3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip output extension).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
11.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Overload
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured according to the external
circuitry and the plant requirements. Also the function parameters have to be set according to the
data of the protected object.
The compensation of the relay rated current to the nominal current of the protected object is
carried out via the parameter setting CT ratio compensation as per the formula below:
Compensation =
Ie
In
Ie
In
With the parameter "Pre-set" the thermal replica of the protected object can be provided with
an initial loading value which is accepted after each system start, i.e. each system reset after
parameter setting changes, loss of DC auxiliary supply, etc.
The heating- and cooling time constants are separately configurable and will be activated according
to the operating mode via suitable external input contacts.
The parameter "Temperature Limit is during heating approached after a few time constants.
The method for considering the cooling medium temperature can be selected via the menu item
Cooling Medium Temperature. When Measuring is chosen the cooling medium temperature
can be included with Pt 100 elements via measuring transducers.
In case of Pre-set is selected the temperature configured with the parameter setting Temperature
Pre-set is used for the assessment of the cooling medium temperature.
By a wire break or short on the cable connection to the Pt 100 element a measuring
fault alarm is initiated and the overload protection is continuing the computations
with the parameter Pre-set configured temperature value until the fault is rectified.
The characteristic of the measuring transducer is configured via 3 additional parameter:
With the "Measuring Sensitivity" menu the slope of the transducer characteristic is
determined by the mV/degree setting.
The gradient of the characteristic, either rising or falling, is set in the "Gradient" menu.
The transducer voltage output value at 0C is configured with the parameter "Voltage
at 0 Degrees".
Secondary injection tests for overload functions are generally very time consuming due
to the slow response times of the protection. When injecting higher current values to speed
up the test procedure care should be taken as not to overload the current input CTs which
have a maximum continuous rating of 4 x In.
DID-001-1.02
Page 338 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
The function tests are preferably carried out with the primary plant out of service.
With a relay test set inject the test current into the first phase input, e.g. with 3 times
the setting value Ie and verify the current indication via the menu option "System,
Analogue Values".
Switch off the test current and check whether the Pre-loading is at 0 and the parameter
Cooling Medium Temperature is the target value 0 and send the parameter set of the overload
protection to the DRS. Inject the previously adjusted test current again and record the operating
time.
The operating time is calculated according to formula (6) by applying following values:
TTr = Limit........... i.e. operating temperature equals the heating temperature limit
TCM = 0.................... i.e. cooling medium temperature with pre-set value 0
I/I0 = 3....................... i.e. test current equals 3 times the current setting
ta = E.ln
1
1
9
= E.ln
9
= E. 0,118
8
Verify the temperature rise via the menu item "Actual Measured Values" in the display window
of the protective function and record the operating time as well as the injected current value
into the commissioning test sheets.
Switch off the test current and observe the decrease of the temperature indication.
The temperature value after 1 time constant is derived according to formula (4)
T ( A ) = 0 e 1 = 0 0.368
i.e. that after 1 time constant when switching off the injected current the temperature display
must only be approximately 37% of the value at the instant of operation. Enter the temperature
value into the commissioning test sheets.
The same procedure should be applied for the other phases and the measured results noted
in the sheets.
After secondary injection tests all modified test parameters should be re-configured to the required
original service settings.
In case of an external cooling medium temperature evaluation a variable resistor decade can
be inserted into this circuit instead of the temperature element. Carry out the wire resistanceand the amplification matching according to the measuring transducer specification by checking the
resistance value in relation with the temperature in the "Actual Measured Values" window.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and the LED indications according to the parameter settings
and the circuit diagrams.
A test of the configured function blocking input for each stage should be done in conjunction with a
continuous initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal for each stage can be verified
without any external initiation.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to
the plant setting values according to system requirements.
DID-001-1.02
Page 340 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
12.1 OVERVIEW
List of the available MN . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MN . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1015
MN211
46
C2,M,L
1086
MN311
46
C2,M,L
1016
MN221
46
C2,M,L
1087
MN321
46
C2,M,L
1017
MN222
46
C2,M
1088
MN322
46
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1015
MN211
ANSI
Application
46
C2,M,L
MN211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 50 % in 0.5 % steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 342 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1086
MN311
ANSI
Application
46
C2,M,L
MN311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Alarm
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 2 ... 50 % in 0.5 % steps
Operating time stage 1: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1016
MN221
ANSI
Application
46
C2,M,L
MN221
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Alarm stage 1
Trip stage 1
Alarm stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 344 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1087
MN32
1
ANSI
46
Application
C2,M,L
MN321
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Alarm stage 1
Trip stage 1
Alarm stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 346 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1017
ANSI
MN22
2
Application
46
C2,M
2 phase negative phase sequence function with thermal overload characteristic and
alarm- and trip stage.
MN222
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation:
Formula:
Generator rated current = CT ratio compensation
x function nominal current
Continuous NPS load:
Note: The generator rated current (=100%)
related to the maximum permissible negative
phase sequence current (=continuous NPS)
determines the setting value
Time constant:
Alarm output:
Note: 100 % of the configured continuous
permissible NPS
Trip output:
Note: 100 % of the configured continuous
permissible NPS
DID-001-1.02
Page 348 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1088
ANSI
MN32
2
Application
46
C2,M
3 phase negative phase sequence function with thermal overload characteristic and
alarm- and trip stage.
MN322
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation:
Formula:
Generator rated current = CT ratio compensation
x function nominal current
Continuous NPS load:
Note: The generator rated current (=100%)
related to the maximum permissible negative
phase sequence current (=continuous NPS)
determines the setting value
Time constant:
Alarm output:
Note: 100 % of the configured continuous
permissible NPS
Trip output:
Note: 100 % of the configured continuous
permissible NPS
DID-001-1.02
Page 350 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
I L1
I L3
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LEGEND:
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 08
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 06
OUT 09
UAKB
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
2 TEST ST.2 (opt.)
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) -
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 03
I3
29
G
3~
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 352 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
2 TEST ST.2 (opt.)
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
2
1
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
G
3~
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GEN.
OUT 03
I3
29
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L3
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L2
UAKB
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
12.3.3 MN222
+ L3
X1
I L1
I L3
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LEGEND:
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
G
3~
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 354 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
12.3.4 MN322
+ X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
OUT 03
I3
29
G
3~
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L3
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L2
UAKB
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
1
MN221 only!
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
2
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
2
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
ALARM
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 356 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR. = I2
NOTEBOOK
IL1
I L1
CALCULATION of:
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3
I L3
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
IL2
IL3
Alarm st.1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Alarm st.2
LEGEND:
1 Assume: I0 = 0
(ZERO SEQU. CURR.
equals 0) because
gen-neutral is isolated.
Note:
I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) = 0.
TEST ST.2
3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t1 >
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
3
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
LEGEND:
3 MN221 only.
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION of:
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3
1
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
j.X
NPS-CURR: I2.
I2 = |IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3| / 3
where: a = 1.ej.2/3 = -1/2 + j. 3/2
a
120 2/3
a
NPS 1A
IL2 = 1A
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
IL3 = 1A
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
MN211 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
MN221 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 12-7
DID-001-1.02
Page 358 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
MN321 only!
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
2
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
2
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
ALARM
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK
I L1
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
I L2
I L3
I2
Alarm st.1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEGEND:
j.2 /3
1 a = 1.e = -1/2 + j. 3/2
Alarm st.2
1
0
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
>=1
ALARM ST.1
&
&
ALARM ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t1 >
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
1
0
LEGEND:
2 MN321 only.
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 360 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
..
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
NPS-CURR: I2.
I2 = (IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3
where: a = 1.ej.2 /3 = -1/2 + j. 3/2
a
120
240
IL1 = 1A
4 /3
2 /3
1
REAL
a
(NPS-current) = 1A
IL2 = 1A
GEN.
G
3~
IL3 = 1A
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
MN311 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
MN321 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 12-10
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
12.4.3 MN222
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I L1
I L3
G
3~
GEN.
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 362 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT
(related to GEN-NOMINAL)
LOAD (note: 100% final rotor temp. at
cont. unbal. load)
NOTEBOOK
IL1
I L1
CALCULATION of:
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3
I L3
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
IL2
IL3
1 Assume: I0 = 0
(ZERO SEQU. CURR.
equals 0) because
gen-neutral is isolated.
Trip
100%
of max.
allowed
rotor
temp.
Note:
I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
= 0.
Alarm
4 set value NPS Alarm
a = 1.ej.4/3
= 1/2 - j. 3/2
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
a = 1.ej.2/3
= -1/2 + j. 3/2
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
ALARM
>=1
&
BLOCKING
&
ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
LEDMATRIX
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 12-12
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN222
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
..
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
4
Explanation: see LOGIC DIAGRAMM/ PROCESSING
note
Trip
100%
of max.
allowed
rotor
temp.
Alarm
set value NPS Alarm
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING/ LEGEND
Fig. 12-13
DID-001-1.02
Page 364 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
12.4.4 MN322
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT
(related to GEN-NOMINAL)
LOAD (note: 100% final rotor temp. at
cont. unbal. load)
NOTEBOOK
I L1
IL1
I L2
IL2
I L3
IL3
CALCULATION of:
|I2| =
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
2
Trip
100%
of max.
allowed
rotor
temp.
Note:
I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
0.
Alarm
4 set value NPS Alarm
a = 1.ej.4/3
= 1/2 - j. 3/2
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
a = 1.ej.2/3
= -1/2 + j. 3/2
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
ALARM
>=1
&
BLOCKING
&
ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
LEDMATRIX
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 12-15
DID-001-1.02
Page 366 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN322
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
Trip
100%
of max.
allowed
rotor
temp.
Alarm
CAUTION:
LOAD will be set to ZERO if :
1. BLOCK OF FUNCTION
2. SEND PARAMETERS
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
LED-indications of
PROCESSING-board
(row 2...14)
>
<
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 12-16
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
For example:
NPS Trip = 110% = set.
110%
100%
90%
of max.
allowed
rotor
temp.
EXAMPLE:
Gen. nom. current: 2500A
C.T. nom current: 3000/1A
CT Ratio Comp.: 2500/3000 = 0,8
Max. allowed cont. I2-current for the gen.: 5% (related to gen. nom. (I1-) current)
Settings (example only):
CT Ratio Comp. = 0,8
Cont. Unbal. Load = 5% ( 100% final temp. reference)
Time Constant acc. to rotor temp. characteristic.
NPS-Alarm: 90% (referred to 100% temp. reference)
NPS-Trip: 110% (referred to 100% temp. reference)
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
Fig. 12-17
DID-001-1.02
Page 368 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
12.5 FUNCTION
12.5.1 DT Charakteristik: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321
External single pole short circuits in solidly- or low impedance earthed power systems as well
as two phase short circuits, transmission line conductor break and faults on circuit breaker
poles are causing very high unsymmetrical loading of the generators.
Every unsymmetrical rotating field for high impedance grounded systems can be divided into
a positive- and a negative phase sequence current component whereby the negative phase
sequence system will induce a rotor current with twice the nominal frequency leading to a
non-permissible overheating of the damper winding.
The negative phase sequence protection is evaluating this dangerous situation and is initiating
a generator shut down in case of the NPS component is exceeding the permissible value.
To determine the negative phase sequence component the NPS of the generator current is
computed. According to the method of the symmetrical components the NPS system is:
I2 =
1
IL1 + a2IL 2 + aIL 3
3
and a =
1
3
+j
2
2
Phase currents
Negative phase sequence current
For isolated- and high impedance grounded generator neutrals following formula applies
IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3 = 0
and subsequently for the negative phase sequence system.
I2 =
j
3
(bIL1 + IL3 )
with
b=
1
3
j
2
2
For the rotor heating the NPS system value is the major component of the temperature rise.
I2 =
1
bIL1 + IL3
3
The factor b represents a phase shift of the unit vector by -60 electrical.
Measuring Principle:
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. By means of the Fourier
Analysis (DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for the 1st harmonic is computed
and transferred to the CPU.
For each sample interval and phase the CPU is evaluating the negative phase sequence component
and also for each sample interval the amplitude value regarding the initiating
conditions, .i.e. 24 consecutive samples (=2 cycles ) above the setting value, is checked
and if exceeded the initiation is started and after the set time delay a trip signal is given.
The alarm and a possible trip out put will reset when during 36 consecutive samples (3 cycles)
the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip signal extension).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
I2 =
1
IL1 + a2IL 2 + aIL 3
3
a=
with
1
3
+j
2
2
Phase currents
Negative phase sequence current
For isolated- and high impedance grounded generator neutrals following formula applies
IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3 = 0
And subsequently for the negative phase sequence system
I2 =
j
3
(bIL1 + IL3 )
with
b=
1
3
j
2
2
For the rotor heating the NPS system value is the major component of the temperature rise.
I2 =
1
bIL1 + IL3
3
(1)
The factor b represents a phase shift of the unit vector by -60 electrical.
The temperature rise of the rotor, respectively the damper winding itself according to a
simplified model is illustrated in the following formula:
(t ) = Limit
Thereby is
t
I 2
1 e
I 2 , 0
(2)
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring Principle:
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. By means of the Fourier
Analysis (DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for the 1st harmonic is computed
and transferred to the CPU.
For each sample interval and phase the CPU is evaluating the negative phase sequence
component.
With a simple differential equation the derived temperature rise after each time interval t
on the basis of the measured NPS current as well as from the previous temperature value samples
is illustrated in the formula below and calculated as follows
2
I 2, a
1
a t
= Limit
I 2, 0
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
12.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
12.6.1 DT Characteristic: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured according to the external
circuitry and the plant requirements. Also the function parameters have to be set according to the
data of the protected object. For this the generator rating for the negative phase sequence current
withstand capability which is obtained from the data sheets of the machine is to be configured in
% of the generator nominal current as follows:
I2,Re l / % = I2,Gen / %.
ING
INW
Is =
1
3
.Ie
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
A test of the configured function blocking input for each stage should be done in conjunction with a
continuous initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal for each stage can be verified
without any external initiation.
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to
the plant setting values according to the plant requirements.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Compensation =
IG
IR
IG
IR
The values for the continuous NPS load and the time constants are to be taken from the machine
data sheet specifications. For the alarm- and trip load the required values are configured in % of the
temperature limit Limit .
The function tests are preferably carried out with the primary plant out of service.
With a relay test set inject the test current into the first phase input and raise the current to produce
operation of the function.
Please note that the injected current Ie is shown in the DRS function menu "Actual Measured
Values" and the displayed NPS current value Is is according to the formula below.
Is =
1
3
.Ie
Switch off the test current and operate the RESET key to restore the NPS thermal loading of the
negative phase sequence protective function.
CAUTION: The RESET key may only be operated during the secondary injection tests and not
during the primary checks since the protective function will have an interrupt which can cause
an inadvertent protection trip!
Switch on the pre-adjusted test current again and measure the tripping time delay.
The operating time ta is calculated according to the formula
t a = .ln
I2
I2.o
1
I 2
1 - 2,0
I2
(6)
DID-001-1.02
Page 374 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
t a = ln
9
= ln = 0.118
1
8
1
9
1
Check the load increase via the menu option "Actual Measured Values" in the display
window of the DRS function and record the operating time as well as the injected current
into the commissioning test sheets.
The same procedure should be applied for the other phases and the measured results noted
in the sheets.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and the LED indications according to the parameter settings
and the circuit diagrams.
A test of the configured function blocking input for each stage should be done in conjunction with a
continuous initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal for each stage can be verified
without any external initiation.
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to
the plant setting values according to system requirements.
Primary Commissioning Tests:
During the primary tests the function of the protection system is checked under regular
service and as far as power system operation permits following tests are recommended:
Short Circuit Test:
Apply a two-pole short circuit of adequate rating located at a position where
primary current can flow through the respective CT set.
Disable protection trips.
Insert measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or open the internal measured
values window in the DRS User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to verify the NPS
current temperature rise according to the configured characteristic.
Record the test results.
Restore protection trips.
If possible and when power system conditions permit shut down the generator
via a live protective function trip and remove the short circuit.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 376 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
13 MP... POWER
13.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MP . . . - Power Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MP . . .
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
Applicati
on
1067
MP111
32
C2,M,L
1019
MP311
32
C2,M,L
1020
MP321
32
C2,M,L
1021
MP312
32
C2,M,L
1083
MP101
32
C2,M,L
1082
MP301
32
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1067
MP111
ANSI
32
Application
C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection.
MP111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Power direction:
Type:
CT error compensation :
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 378 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1019
MP311
ANSI
32
Application
C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection.
MP311
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltages input system 12
Voltages input system 23
Voltages input system 31
Binary: Blocking input
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Power direction:
Type:
Phase rotation:
CT error compensation :
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 380 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1020
MP321
ANSI
32
Application
C2,M,L
3 phase, 2 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection per stage.
MP321
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltages input system 12
Voltages input system 23
Voltages input system 31
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Blocking input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Power direction:
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Type stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type stage 2:
Phase rotation:
CT error compensation :
Direction 1/Direction 2
2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
0 ... 600 s in 0.1 s steps
Unter-Erfassung/ber-Erfassung
2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
0 ... 600 s in 0.1 s steps
Unter-Erfassung/ber-Erfassung
Right/Left
-10 ... +10 deg. in 0.1 deg. steps
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 382 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1021
MP31
2
ANSI
32
Application
C2,M,L
MP312
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltages input system 12
Voltages input system 23
Voltages input system 31
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Power direction:
Type:
Phase rotation:
CT error compensation :
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 384 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1083
ANSI
MP10
1
Application
C2,M,L
MP101
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Outputs
Analogue: Power (analogue output of internal measured value)
Setting Parameters
Power direction: Direction 1/Direction 2
CT error compensation : -10 ... +10 deg. in 0.1 deg. steps
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
Measuring
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1082
ANSI
MP30
1
Application
C2,M,L
MP301
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltages input system 12
Voltages input system 23
Voltages input system 31
Outputs
Analogue: Power (analogue output of internal measured value)
Setting Parameters
Power direction: Direction 1/Direction 2
Phase rotation: Right/Left
CT error compensation : -10 ... +10 deg. in 0.1 deg. steps
In VA
In W
In VAr
-
Measuring
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 386 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
GEN.
G
3~
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
LEGEND:
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L3L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L3
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L2
UAKB
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 388 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
APPARENT POWER
REAL POWER
REACTIVE POWER
POWER FACTOR
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
U1 (PPS)
resp.
U2 (NPS)
I L1
I L2
I L3
I1 (PPS)
resp.
I2 (NPS)
CALCULATION of:
APPARENT POWER
(ANGLES OF
CURRENT PHASORS)
minus
(Set Value C.T.Error Comp.)
REAL POWER
REACTIVE POWER
POWER FACTOR
TEST
(REAL POWER) < (OPERATE VALUE)
BIN. I/0
PRESET
see
LEDDISPLAY
1 2
1
0
ALARM
BLOCKING
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
1
0
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
TRIP
t>
FUNCTION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
SIGN:
- REVERSE POWER
+ FORWARD POWER
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
SIGN:
- OVEREXCITED
+ UNDEREXCITED
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MP312
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
(ANGLES OF
CURRENT PHASORS)
minus
(Set Value C.T.Error Comp.)
Please note:
Sign of REAL POWER:
+ forward power
- reverse power
./.
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND page 1/2
Fig. 13-4
DID-001-1.02
Page 390 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
./. (cont.)
LEGEND
CALCULATION of:
APPARENT POWER
REAL POWER
REACTIVE POWER
PROCESSING
Please note:
If you choose to see these DRS internal calculated values as Secondary
Values (=standard) then the %-numbers are referred to relay nom.values.
POWER FACTOR
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
LED-indications of PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND page 2/2
Fig. 13-5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
13.5 FUNCTION
Directional- and Reverse Power
Directional power functions can be integrated into a protective scheme for various application
possibilities according to plant requirements.
As a maximum power protection to evaluate over power conditions by increasing water head and/or
non-permissible opening of the turbine regulator in generator mode.
As pump power monitoring in conjunction with a frequency function in pump storage systems.
As reverse power protection for water power machines with a higher operating value or as very
sensitive adjustable functions in case of steam turbine sets.
As minimum power protection in pump storage systems to guard against non-permissible closure
of the guide vanes by the governor control to prevent turbulences with subsequent dangerous
overheating in the spiral casing.
With the method of the symmetrical components it can be derived that the power computation of
a three phase system can be reduced to the evaluation of the positive sequence power only.
The algorithm of the directional power- and reverse power function therefore determines from the 12
samples each cycle the positive phase sequence component of the current I1, respectively the
voltage V1 according to the formulas
DID-001-1.02
Page 392 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
13.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
Also the function parameters have to be set according to the data of the protected object
whereby it should be considered that for the operating value PE a calibration has to be
carried out according to the formula below.
PE (%) =
PB
PN
Thereby is
PB
PN
Pm (%) = 3
V I
cos
VN I N
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
IN
VN
Alter the injected value to the function reset direction and record the reset value in the test sheets.
To check the function with a single phase test set inject the current into, say phase L1 and the
voltage into system 1 and adjust the values in the operating direction accordingly whereby any
possible external blocking inputs should be disabled.
The relation between the injected quantities V and I and the displayed real power value Pm(%) is as
follows:
Pm (%) =
IN
VN
V I
cos
6 VN I N
DID-001-1.02
Page 394 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
14.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MP . . . Sudden Load Loss Protective Function
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MP . . .
FNNR TYPE
1084
MP319
ANSI
32
Application
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Page 396 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1084
ANSI
MP319
Application
C2,M,L
32
3 phase, 1 stage sudden load loss function with blocking provisions during unsymmetrical
load currents.
MP319
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
NPS load interlock
Setting Parameters
Monitoring time:
Impedance circle R1:
:
Impedance ring R1-R2:
NPS load:
Blocking time:
Phase rotation:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current
DID-001-1.02
Page 398 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
LEGEND:
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
OUT 06
OUT 09
UAKB
GEN.
G
3~
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L2L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L3L1
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 400 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.
SUPERVISION TIME STARTED
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
U1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
I L1
I L2
I L3
U1
I1
=Z1
I1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
RESET PROT.
FUNCTION!
I2
|I2|>
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
LOCUS Z1
R
R2
R1
ALARM
&
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
&
BLOCK BY I2 >
1
0
ALARM
BLOCKING
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
1
0
TRIP
>=1
&
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
1
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
SOFTWARE-MODULE: MP319
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
U1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
I2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
|I2|>
=Z1
LOCUS Z1
R
R2
R1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
POS.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
regular
function
I1
POS.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
I1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
OUTPUT
U1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
..
ALARM
RESET PROT.
FUNCTION!
78MHO ALARM
78MHO TRIP
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 402 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM:
X
SEQUENCE:
CIRCLE
R1
1
LOCUS START
3
CIRCLE
R2
LEGEND:
1
SUPERVISION TIME (MIN. TIME): Requires the impedance phasor (LOCUS) to pass through
the circular ring (R1-R2) longer than this time, thus the function is activated and the output of
the protective function may be set (if no other blocking active).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM:
X
LOCUS START
R1
3
ALARM
R2
TRIP
TIMING OF SEQUENCE:
ALARM
t
START
SUPERVISION
TIME
t
SET VALUE
SUPERVISION TIME
R2 (LOCUS CROSSES
CIRCLE R2)
2
TRIP = BLOCK OF
IMPEDANCE PROTECTION SYSTEM
ACTUAL (=OK.)
2
TRIP
t
LENGTH OF TRIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY SET VALUE RECLAIM TIME
(DURATION OF BLOCKING SIGNAL FOR IMPEDANCE PROTECTION).
RELAY
READY
AGAIN
t
DID-001-1.02
Page 404 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
14.5 FUNCTION
Phase current = 1 A
(Note: 3 phase current has to be symmetrical, otherwise block by NPS
Voltage =
Display =
Note:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Setting Values:
Setting Parameters
Monitoring time:
Impedance circle R1:
Impedance ring R1-R2:
NPS load:
Blocking time:
Phase rotation:
Monitoring time:
For the impedance locus when crossing the R1-R2 ring from the outside to the inside this time
duration has to be at least required to initiate the function otherwise when the passed time is too
short the function will reset.
Impedance circle R1:
Outer characteristic of both circles defining the impedance ring.
Impedance ring R1-R2:
Distance between R1 and R2, i.e. difference between radius R1 and radius R2.
Caution: Not to be considered as radius R2!
NPS Load:
The value corresponds to the NPS current system. When exchanging two of the three phases
the negative phase sequence load will be 100 %.
The MP119 function is blocked during NPS load conditions, respectively then the distance
protection will not be blocked.
Blocking time:
This setting specifies the trip output duration of the MP119, i.e. the blocking command for the
distance protection relay.
Operating sequence:
When the impedance locus enters circle R1 the MP119 function is initiated and by crossing
circle R2 the trip, i.e. blocking command is given whereby the time duration is defined by the
Blocking Time parameter configuration.
Phase rotation:
The phase rotation encountered during normal operating conditions in relation to the current
input matrix of the MP119 function.
DID-001-1.02
Page 406 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
14.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
With a relay test set inject following 3 phase symmetrical quantities:
- Phase currents
- Phase to Phase voltages
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Shifting the impedance vector by slowly increasing the test current and keeping the test voltage
constant function initiation and trip is to be confirmed.
The impedance locus has to cross the setting characteristic from outside to the inside whereby
it has to be considered that for crossing R1-R2 a minimum time is required (Monitoring Time) to
produce an output otherwise when crossing too fast the function will reset.
Note:
By single phase current injection the NPS interlock will respond thereby causing either function
block or function reset.
Note:
The phase rotation has to be considered and if necessary the corresponsing parameter setting
modified according to requirements.
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
NPS load interlock
The correct function operation can be verified with the aid of the window display of the internal
measured values:
Window Display for Relay Internal
Determined and Computed Values
System impedance: In Ohm
NPS load: In %
Delay time in progress: Yes / No
If required a temporary change of the setting parameters should be done to carry out the tests
and to verify the various operating sequences more comfortably:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Setting Parameters
Monitoring time:
Impedance circle R1:
Impedance ring R1-R2:
NPS load:
Blocking time:
Phase rotation:
DID-001-1.02
Page 408 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
15.1 OVERVIEW
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MQ . . .
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
Application
Inadvertent energising
1076
MQ311
27/50 C2,M,L
1080
MQ312
27/51 C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1076
ANSI
MQ311
Application
27/50
C2,M,L
MQ311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I:
Operating value U:
Operating time delay:
Reset time delay:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 410 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1080
ANSI
MQ312
Application
27/51
C2,M,L
MQ312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I:
Voltage interlock:
K factor:
Time delay:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
G
3~
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 07
OUT 09
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
U L3L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 412 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
15.3.2 MQ312
+ -
L3
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
G
3~
GEN.
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
LEGEND:
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
UAKB
U L3L1
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 414 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U>
U L2L3
U>
>=1
&
U L3L1
U>
TEST
BLOCKING
1
t > PICK-UP
DELAY
I L1
I>
I L3
U > BLOCKING
FOR I > TRIP
= ACTIVE!
I>
I L2
t < DROP-OFF
DELAY
>=1
TRIP
&
I>
TEST
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP I >
LEDDISPLAY
INADVERTENT
ENERGIZATION
DETECTED
TRIP!
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
1
0
TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
TRIP
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MQ311
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
U>
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
t < DROP-OFF
DELAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
I>
t > PICK-UP
DELAY
regular
function
BLOCKING OF
I>
BY U >
U>
U>
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 416 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
UGEN
SET VALUE U
U>
t
BLOCK OF I > BY U >
IGEN
PICK-UP
DELAY
DROP-OFFDELAY
DROP-OFFDELAY
PICK-UP
DELAY
BLOCK
BLOCK
SET VALUE I
I>
t
I > & NO BLOCK = TRIP
1
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
15.4.2 MQ312
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I L1
I1
I L2
I2
I L3
I3
U1
U L1L2
1
U2
U L2L3
U2
U L2
U3
U L3
G
3~
DRS STANDARD
APPLICATION
USES Uph-ph
NON-STANDARD
APPLICATION
USES Uph
U1
U L1
GEN.
U3
U L3L1
2
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
GEN.STARPOINT
ISOLATED OR
EARTHED VIA RESISTOR
(DRS STANDARD):
USE PHASE-PHASE VOLT.
GEN.STARPOINT EARTHED
(OPT.):
USE PHASE-GND VOLT.
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
51 Alarm
51 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 418 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
IL1>Iset
IL2>Iset
IL3>Iset
IL1>k.Iset
IL2>k.Iset
&
IL3>k.Iset
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
>=1
&
&
UL1L2<Uset
U < Uset
UL2L3<Uset
>=1
UL3L1<Uset
TEST
LEDDISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
t > tset
1
0
&
TRIP
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 15-8
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MQ312
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
IL1>Iset
OUTPUT
IL1>k.Iset
UL1L2<Uset
t > tset
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 420 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
TRIP
if
U < Uset
TRIP
tset
ALARM
if
U < Uset
ALARM
I
k Iset
Iset
OPERATE VALUE
VOLTAGE LIMIT
OPERATE VALUE k-FACTOR
TIME DELAY
(DEFINITE TIME CHARACTERISTIC)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
15.5 FUNCTION
15.5.1 MQ311
The inadvertent energising function MQ311 is a 3 phase, 1 stage current protection provided
with a voltage interlock.
Principle:
Accidental energising of the generator unit at standstill, i.e. the power system voltage is
suddenly applied under short circuit conditions and limited only by the generator-transformer
impedances thereby causing an instantaneous high short circuit current inrush is detected by
this protective function.
The function is monitoring the system conditions during synchronising and on-load operation
and in case of an non-permissible V/I relation a protection trip is immediately initiated.
The inadvertent energising protection is basically an overcurrent function which is time delayed
blocked at rising voltages and time delayed de-blocked during falling system voltages (please
also refer to the LOGIC DIAGRAMS).
Therefore the function is only active for a short time during generator excitation start-up and is
subsequently blocked (time delayed) until the unit is taken out of service.
Algorithm:
When one of the three input voltages is exceeding the setting Operating Value V the current
function will remain active within the configured time delay Delay on Pick-up.
Subsequently the current function is blocked and can also be defined as BLOCK ON Delay.
As soon as the three input voltages are falling below the set value the internal function block is
de-activated and can therefore be denominated as a BLOCK OFF Delay.
In case of no function block and one of the three currents is larger than the "Operating Value I"
an instantaneous trip signal is immediately given.
DID-001-1.02
Page 422 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
15.5.2 MQ312
The voltage controlled overcurrent function MQ312 is a 3 phase overcurrent protection with a
voltage controlled definite time delayed (DT) operating characteristic.
Principle:
Change of the time-current characteristic at a definite set voltage value and it should be noted that
the function is operating differently to the Voltage Restraint O/C MI318 which is altering the
operating characteristic continuously with respect to the voltage.
When one of the three input voltages drops below the Voltage Limit setting the internal operating
value is changing from
"Operating Value"
to
"Operating Value x K Factor".
Generators with solidly earthed neutrals are using the phase to neutral voltages whereby
the recommended setting Voltage Limit is approximately 60% nominal covering phase to
phase and phase to earth faults.
b)
For impedance earthed or ungrounded generator neutrals the recommended phase to phase
voltage Voltage Limit setting is approximately 30 % of the nominal voltage rating whereby
the function is operating only in case of phase to phase faults.
Definition of this Function for the DRS System:
The operating characteristic change does not depend on a current/time curve but is fixed to a
definite time delayed overcurrent performance which is reducing the current setting should the
system voltage decrease below a defined level.
The application of this DRS System function is in general for generator units having a neutral
impedance grounding, i.e. neutral distribution transformer earthing, a neutral earthing resistor, or
for ungrounded systems. This means that the parameter setting Voltage Limit is using the phase to
phase voltage values thereby operating for phase to phase short circuit faults. The recommended
setting for the voltage limit is about 30% nominal and for the K factor configuration
approximately 0.4
Characteristic:
The function is representing a relation between the phase currents and the phase to phase voltages.
The internal characteristic change from the current setting I to K x I is common for all three phases
in case of one of the three phase to phase voltages falls below the configured Voltage Limit value
meaning that in each chase the smallest phase to phase voltage and the highest
phase current are considered.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
15.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
15.6.1 MQ311
3 phase, 1 stage inadvertent energising current function with provided with a
voltage interlock.
Pre-Commissioning:
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test current above the setting parameter
"Operating Value I" until the function operates.
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test current above the setting parameter
"Operating Value I" and at the same time a three phase test voltage below the
setting parameter Operating Value V until the function operates.
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test voltage above the setting parameter
Operating Value V and after the Delay on Pick-up time apply one ore more
phase currents above the configured "Operating Value I" setting. The relay function is
blocked and cannot operate.
Note: The current function time delayed blocked after raising the generator voltage during
start-up and time delayed re-activated after de-excitation of the generator.
The tests can therefore be finalised by two ways:
a)
Currents and voltages are switched off simultaneously ... no trip.
b)
The voltage is switched off and only after expiry of the Delay on Drop-off setting the test
current is switched off ... trip.
Note: During generator standstill where the voltage is zero the function is always active!
DID-001-1.02
Page 424 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Note:
Setting Parameters
Operating value I:
Operating value V:
Delay on pick-up:
Delay on drop-off:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
15.6.2 MQ312
3 phase voltage controlled overcurrent protection with a DT characteristic.
DID-001-1.02
Page 426 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
16.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MR . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MR . . .
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
Application
1030
MR111
40
C2,M
1062
MR112
40
C2,M
1040
MR121
40
C2,M
1092
MR131
40
C2A, M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1030
MR111
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
MR111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input rotor-ground resistance
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 500 ... 5000 Ohm in 10 Ohm steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 3 cycles typical
Accuracy: +/- 70 Ohm within the range 2 ... 2.5 kOhm
+/- 200 Ohm within the range 1 ... 3 kOhm
+/- 1 kOhm within the range 0.6 ... 4 kOhm
DID-001-1.02
Page 428 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1062
MR112
ANSI
Application
40
C2,M
MR112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input rotor-ground resistance
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 500 ... 5000 Ohm in 10 Ohm steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 3 cycles typical
Accuracy: +/- 70 Ohm within the range 2 ... 2.5 kOhm
+/- 200 Ohm within the range 1 ... 3 kOhm
+/- 1 kOhm within the range 0.6 ... 4 kOhm
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1040
MR121
ANSI
40
Application
C2,M
MR121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input "Rotor Insulation"
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 430 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: typical 0.5 ... 3 min.
Accuracy: Typical better than 3 % (referred to the range
limit value)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR
1092
TYPE
MR131
ANSI Application
40
C2A,M
2. Stage: 2 20 kOhm / 0 99 s
Remark:. Hardware auxiliary module "UAKB" is necessary
2-stage high impedance rotor earth fault (rotor insulation).
Caution: maximum allowed capacity of measuring unit, which is connected galvanically with
the plant part: 10 F.
Remark: Hardware auxiliary module "UAKB" is necessary
Remark:
Detailled description of auxiliary module "UAKB": see
"Description of axiliary module UAKB
Universal Ankoppel Baustein CIC-012-A"
Important: This description also contains information about various variants of rotor earth
fault protection with UAKB (depending on mode of excitation system, etc.) and about further
functions of UAKB module (measuring transducer, shaft current, etc.).
MR131
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC-input "UAKB"-output signal
(corresponds to rotor - earth resistor)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 432 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: typ. 300 ms ... 2 s, depending on
rotor-earth capacity.
Accuracy: typ. better than 3 % (related to range end value)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L3
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
adjust eIEGL23":
a) 50/60Hz
(Jumper X5 or X6)
b) 110VAC
(Jumper X2 = 2-3)
Aux. Supply
110/220VAC/
50(60)Hz SAFE AC
110
VAC
50Hz only
60Hz only
X1 1
PANEL
IEGL150"
50Hz X1
16
X1 11
SHIELD
20
60Hz
14
15
13
110VAC 220VAC
only
only
4
X1
220
VAC
+
+
+
+
-
19
12
10
FUSE
6A
POWER STATION
EARTH POTENTIAL
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
FOR MAINTENANCE
WORKS AT ROTOR
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF
AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
ROTOR
I2
OPTIONAL MODULES
G
3~
GEN.
I1
eIU124
TRANSFORMER
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
EURAX
EXC.
TRANSF.
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
eIEGL23
L2
MIEGL
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006--
NOTEBOOK
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 434 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST
ST.2
DC AUX. VOLT.
(optional)
(110/220/24VDC)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
Aux. Supply: 230VAC
50(60)Hz SAFE SUPPLY BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
+
+
+
+
+
-
PANEL IEGL400"
X1
X1
11
SHIELD
12
R
not connected
X1
10
2 5
FUSE
6A
FUSE
6A
13
POWER
STATION
EARTH
POTENTIAL
I6
I8
FOR MAINTENANCE
WORKS AT ROTOR
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF
AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B.
I9
I 10
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 400VACRMS
(150...400VACRMS).
NOTE: IF V > 400VACRMS
use IEGL850!
IF V < 150VACRMS
use IEGL150!
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
I5
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
OUT 14
OUT 15
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
ROTOR
OUT 04
I4
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
G
3~
GEN.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
OPTIONAL MODULES
TRANSFORMER
I2
eIU124
I1
EURAX
EXC.
TRANSF.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
eIEGL23
L2
MIEGL
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006--
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L3
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ROTOR
TEST ST.1
(optional)
+
TEST ST.2
DC AUX. VOLT.
(optional)
(110/220/24VDC)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
Aux. Supply: 230VAC
50(60)Hz SAFE SUPPLY BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
+
+
+
+
3
PANEL IEGL850"
X1
X1
11
X1
10
SHIELD
12
R
1
FUSE
6A
2 5
FUSE
6A
13
not connected
POWER
STATION
EARTH
POTENTIAL
I6
I8
I9
I 10
2
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
I5
FOR MAINTENANCE
WORKS AT ROTOR
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF
AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B.
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 850VACRMS
(400...850VACRMS).
NOTE: IF V < 400VACRMS
use IEGL400!
IF V < 150VACRMS
use IEGL150!
EXT. PANEL IEGL850"
USUALLY MOUNTED
INSIDE EXC. CUBICLE.
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
OUT 14
OUT 15
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
GEN.
OUT 04
I4
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
G
3~
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
OPTIONAL MODULES
TRANSFORMER
I2
eIU124
I1
EURAX
EXC.
TRANSF.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
eIEGL23
L2
MIEGL
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 436 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 400VAC.
NOTE: IF V > 400VAC
use: ext. panel
IEGL850" + module
MIEGL850"!
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULES:
-MIEGL
rotor isolation supervision
-eIEGL
rotor earth fault protection
-EURAX
signal transducer
-eIU124
shaft current supervision
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I6
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
AUX. SUPPLY: 5
SAFE AC 6
230VAC 7
8
P
9
1
10
N
11
12
13
14
SHIELD
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2
COMPACT
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ROTOR
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF
DURING STANDSTILL
BY AUX. CONTACT
OF FIELD BREAKER.
I5
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
OUT 04
I4
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
GEN.
G
3~
OUT 03
OPTIONAL MODULES
TRANSFORMER
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I3
eIU124
I2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
EURAX
EXC.
TRANSF.
I1
eIEGL23
L2
MIEGL
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L3
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4
FUSE 1 X1
2
3
4
4
FUSE 5
13
6A
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF DURING
STANDSTILL BY AUX.
CONTACT OF FIELD
BREAKER (I.E. FOR
MAINT. PURPOSES)
6A
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 850VAC.
NOTE: IF V < 850VAC
PANEL IEGL850"
CAN BE OMITTED
(SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM UPTO 400VAC)
ADDITIONAL EXT. PANEL IEGL850" IN
CASE OF HIGH EXC. VOLTAGE;
USUALLY MOUNTED IN EXC. CUBICLE.
LEGEND:
+
+
+
+
4
HV-FUSES
INSIDE OF
EXC.
CUBICLE.
POWER
STATION
EARTH
POTENTIAL
AUX. SUPPLY:
SAFE AC
230VAC
OPTIONAL MODULES:
-MIEGL
rotor isolation supervision
-eIEGL
rotor earth fault protection
-EURAX
signal transducer
-eIU124
shaft current supervision
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
PANEL
IEGL850"
P
1
SHIELD
I5
I6
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2
COMPACT
OUT 05
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
ROTOR
OUT 04
I4
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
GEN.
G
3~
OUT 03
OPTIONAL MODULES
TRANSFORMER
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I3
eIU124
I2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
EURAX
EXC.
TRANSF.
I1
eIEGL23
L2
MIEGL
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
5
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 438 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L3
X1
EXC.
TRANSF.
TRANSFORMER
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF DURING
STANDSTILL BY AUX.
CONTACT OF FIELD
BREAKER (I.E. FOR
MAINT. PURPOSES)
PRE-RESISTOR MOUNTED IN
EXCITATION CUBICLE
3
FUSE
R 2
6A
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
+
+
+
+
4
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
HV-FUSES
INSIDE OF
EXC.
CUBICLE.
POWER
STATION
EARTH
POTENTIAL
AUX. SUPPLY:
SAFE AC
230VAC
SHIELD
5
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 07
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R 2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
IN 04
IN 05
IN 06
IN 07
OUT 21
6
PLEASE NOTE:
OUT 22
USE MODULE
TYPE MIEGL850"
OUT 23
(TYPE MIEGL NOT
OUT 24
PERMISSIBLE).
IN 08
UAKB
ROTOR
6A
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
4
5
6
29
3
FUSE
1A
5A
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
G
3~
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
UAKBFAULT
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
MAIN
TRANSF.
GEN.
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
G
3~
ROTOR
INTERFACE
MODULE
eIEGL23
FOR
ROTOR E/F
PROT.
Aux. Supply
230VAC
eIEGL23
PANEL IEGL150"
4
SLOW INPUT
no.01: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F
(optional)
SERIES RESONANCE
CIRCUIT (closed in case
of ROTOR E/F)
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
IN10
NOTE:
ROTOR E/F
PROT. OUT OF
SERVICE. NOTE:
USE SIGNAL
FUNCTION
(MB111) TO
PROCESS THIS
ALARM
TEST ST.1
PANEL IEGL150"
RECOMMENDED FOR
EXC. TRANSF. PHASEPHASE VOLTAGES:
0...150VACRMS
SI01
TEST ST.2
OUTPUT
(optional)
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor E/F
out of
service
BLOCK. ST.2
RESONANCE VOLTAGE (optional)
in case of ROTOR E/F
LEGEND
DRS
TRIP
COMMANDS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 440 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]
NOTEBOOK
eIEGL23
DC-VOLTAGE
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION [ ]
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
MODULE eIEGL23.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
5k
1k
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
1
0
t > tset
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
1
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR111
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DC-VOLTAGE
5V
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
eIEGL23
1k
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
5k
ROTORINSULATION
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 442 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2
COMPACT
MAIN
TRANSF.
GEN.
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
G
3~
ROTOR
INTERFACE
MODULE
eIEGL23
FOR
ROTOR E/F
PROT.
PANEL IEGL400"
eIEGL23
Aux. Supply
230VAC
EXC. TRANSF.
PHASE-PHASE
VOLT.: MAX. 400V
(150...400VACRMS)
PANEL IEGL400"
RECOMMENDED FOR
EXC. TRANSF. PHASEPHASE VOLTAGES:
150...400VACRMS
SERIES RESONANCE
CIRCUIT (closed in case
of ROTOR E/F)
SLOW INPUT
no.01: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F
ROTOR E/F
OUT OF SERVICE
TEST ST.1
(optional)
SI01
USE SIGNAL
FUNCTION
(MB111) TO
PROCESS THIS
ALARM
TRIP
COMMANDS
TEST ST.2
OUTPUT
(optional)
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor E/F
out of
service
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
PROCESSING
CB1
CB2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]
NOTEBOOK
eIEGL23
DC-VOLTAGE
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION [W]
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
MODULE eIEGL23.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
5k
1k
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
1
0
t > tset
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
1
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Page 444 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR111
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DC-VOLTAGE
5V
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
5k
ROTORINSULATION
eIEGL23
1k
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2
COMPACT
MAIN
TRANSF.
GEN.
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
G
3~
ROTOR
INTERFACE
MODULE
eIEGL23
FOR
ROTOR E/F
PROT.
PANEL IEGL850"
eIEGL23
Aux. Supply
230VAC
EXC. TRANSF.
PHASE-PHASE
VOLT.: MAX. 850V
(400...850VACRMS)
PANEL IEGL850"
RECOMMENDED FOR
EXC. TRANSF. PHASEPHASE VOLTAGES:
400...850VACRMS
SLOW INPUT
NO.01: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F
ROTOR E/F
OUT OF SERVICE
TEST ST.1
SI01
USE SIGNAL
FUNCTION
(MB111) TO
PROCESS THIS
ALARM
(optional)
TRIP
COMMANDS
TEST ST.2
OUTPUT
(optional)
SERIES RESONANCE
CIRCUIT (closed in case
of ROTOR E/F)
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor
E/F
out of
Service
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
PROCESSING
CB1
CB2
DID-001-1.02
Page 446 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE []
NOTEBOOK
eIEGL23
DC-VOLTAGE
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION [W]
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
MODULE eIEGL23.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
5k
1k
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
1
0
t > tset
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
1
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR111
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DC-VOLTAGE
5V
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
eIEGL23
1k
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
5k
ROTORINSULATION
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 448 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
EXC.
TRANSF.
G
3~
GEN.
ROTOR
AUX. SUPPLY:
230VAC
SAFE SUPPLY
INTERFACE
CONNECTION
TO ROTOR
1
INTERFACE
MODULE
MIEGL
FOR
ROTOR
ISOLATION
SUPERVISION
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF DURING
STANDSTILL BY AUX.
CONTACT OF FIELD
BREAKER.
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 400VAC.
NOTE: IF V > 400VAC
use: ext. panel
IEGL850" + module
MIEGL850"!
VOLT. PULSES FROM
PROT. DEVICE APPLIED
TO ROTOR CIRCUIT FOR
MEASURING PURPOSES.
MIEGL
MAIN
TRANSF.
INPUT NO.09
USED FOR
ROTOR
ISOLATION
SUPERVISION/
INTERNAL FAULT
(AUX. SUPPLY
MISSING; MIEGL
FAULTY)
IN09
SI02
V
3
SLOW INPUT
NO.02: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR
ISOLATION
t
0,5 Hz
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
(optional)
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor
insulation
protection
out of
service
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [kW]
NOTEBOOK
MIEGL
DC-VOLTAGE
SI02
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION
[kW] BY USING THE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
OF MODULE MIEGL.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
100k
20k
TEST ST.1
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.1
>=1
BLOCK. ST.1
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
t1 >
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.1
&
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST.2
LEDMATRIX
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
PROCESSING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Page 450 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR121
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DC-VOLTAGE
5V
ROTOR100k INSULATION
MIEGL
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2
EXC.
TRANSF.
G
3~
GEN.
ROTOR
AUX.
SUPPLY:
230VAC
SAFE
SUPPLY
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF
DURING STANDSTILL
BY AUX. CONTACT
OF FIELD BREAKER.
EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.:
MAX. 850VAC.
NOTE: IF V < 400VAC
PANEL IEGL850"
CAN BE OMITTED
(SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM
UP TO 400VAC)
PANEL IEGL850" +
MODULE MIEGL850"
RECOMMENDED FOR
EXC. TRANSF. PHASEPHASE VOLTAGES
FROM 400...850VACRMS
INPUT NO.09
USED FOR
ROTOR
INSULATION
SUPERVISION
OUT OF SERVICE/
INTERNAL FAULT
(AUX. SUPPLY
MISSING; MIEGL
FAULTY)
t
INTERFACE
CONNECTION
TO ROTOR
INTERFACE
MODULE
MIEGL
FOR ROTOR
INSULATION
SUPERVISION
0,5 Hz
PANEL
IEGL850"
MIEGL850
MAIN
TRANSF.
IN09
SI02
SLOW INPUT
NO.02: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR
INSULATION
3
3
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
OUTPUT
(optional)
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor
insulation
protection
out of
service
PULSES FROM
PROTECTION DEVICE
APPLIED TO ROTOR
CIRCUIT FOR
MEASURING PURPOSES
DID-001-1.02
Page 452 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]
NOTEBOOK
MIEGL850
DC-VOLTAGE
SI02
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION
[kW] BY USING THE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
OF MODULE MIEGL.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
100k
20k
TEST ST.1
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
BLOCK. ST.1
ALARM ST.1
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
t1 >
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.1
&
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST.2
LEDMATRIX
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
&
TRIP ST.2
PROCESSING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR121
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
1V
MIEGL850
TRIPMATRIX
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
5V
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
DC-VOLTAGE
20k
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
100k
ROTORINSULATION
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 454 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
EXC.
TRANSF.
MAIN
TRANSF.
G
3~
GEN.
ROTOR
OPTIONAL: ROTOR
E/F PROTECTION
SWITCHED OFF
DURING STANDSTILL
BY AUX. CONTACT
OF FIELD BREAKER.
UAKB
INTERFACE
CONNECTION
TO ROTOR
1
INTERFACE
MODULE
UAKB
FOR ROTOR
INSULATION
SUPERVISION
INPUT NO.09
USED FOR
ROTOR
INSULATION
SUPERVISION
OUT OF SERVICE/
INTERNAL FAULT
(AUX. SUPPLY
MISSING; UAKB
FAULTY)
IN09
SI02
SLOW INPUT
NO.02: ACTUAL
MEASURED
VALUE OF
ROTOR
INSULATION
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(optional)
BLOCK. ST.1
OUTPUT
(optional)
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor
insulation
protection
out of
service
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]
NOTEBOOK
UAKB
DC-VOLTAGE
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
CALCULATION OF
ROTOR INSULATION
[kW] BY USING THE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
OF MODULE MIEGL.
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1
1V
100k
20k
TEST ST.1
ROTOR-INSULATION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
BLOCK. ST.1
ALARM ST.1
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
t1 >
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.1
&
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.2
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST.2
LEDMATRIX
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 456 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DC-VOLTAGE
UAKB
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1V
100k
20k
ROTOR-INSULATION
5,00
4,00
3,00
SI.01 / Vdc
2,00
1,00
0,00
0,0
25,0
50,0
75,0
100,0
125,0
150,0
LEGEND:
SI01 ... DRS-COMPACT2A slow DC-input 01
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR131
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
..
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
DC-VOLTAGE
5V
1V
UAKB
20k
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
ROTOR100k INSULATION
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 458 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
16.5 FUNCTION
16.5.1 MR111/ MR121 / MR131
Rotor earth fault protective functions, respectively rotor insulation protective functions are
applied to monitor the insulation level to ground of the excitation circuit for synchronous machines.
A deterioration of the insulation level can thereby be recognised in time to take preventive measures
against low resistance single- or double earth faults.
The connection is carried out onto the DC circuit of the rotor whereby not only the rotor is supervised
but also all auxiliary circuits with a direct galvanic connection to this system.
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
16.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Insert a resistance decade between a rotor connection, e.g. the slip ring, and the
generator shaft and reduce the setting value to about 10% of the operating value for stage 1
of the rotor insulation protection.
By monitoring the window display of the measured insulation level by selecting the option
"Actual Measured Values" which are approaching asymptotically the final value showing
approximately the value of the test resistor adjustment the correct response of the function
is verified.
Record the operating value display of stage 1 insulation level in the test sheets.
Increase the decade resistor value up to a reset of the stage 1 function and record the displayed
result in the test sheets.
Proceed in a similar way for stage 2.
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be confirmed according to
the external circuitry and the circuit diagrams.
Should in addition to the measuring mode delay another time delay be configured for
each stage they are to be checked by the aforementioned procedures, e.g. via a test
input and the operating times recorded into the test sheets.
Check the configured function block for each stage by applying the blocking signal
when the protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test input for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without external test resistance.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
MR111/ MR121/ Primary Commissioning Tests:
During the primary tests the correct response of the protective function is verified during
system operating conditions and as far as possible following checks should be carried out:
- Open Circuit Voltage Tests:
Block the function trips of the rotor earth fault or rotor insulation protection.
Start up generator to rated speed and excite to nominal voltage.
Apply the same procedures as during the pre-commissioning tests to check the
operating value of the function.
Enter the values into the commissioning sheets.
Verify the possible configured external function block from the plant.
Re-activate the protection trips of the rotor earth fault function, respectively the
rotor insulation function.
If system conditions permit shut down the generator by a protection trip.
Remove all external test devices and restore the applicable parameter settings.
MR131 / Rotor Insulation Protection UAKB):
Refer to: "Description of Module UAKB CIC-012-A" Dwg. No.: CIC-012-A.XX/90
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 462 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MS . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1028
MS111
64G
C2,M,L
1044
MS211
64G
C2,M,L
1032
MS212
64G
C2,M,L
1068
MS213
64G
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1028
MS111
ANSI
Application
64G
C2,M,L
MS111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Slope:
Operating direction:
2 ... 40 V in 1 V steps
0 ... 30 Seconds in 0.05 sec steps
0/30/60/90 degrees
Direction 1/Direction 2
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
2% electrical at angle
DID-001-1.02
Page 464 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1044
MS211
ANSI
64G
Application
C2,M,L
Stator earth fault function with 20 Hz signal injection (20 Hz impedance evaluation).
MS211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current 20 Hz
Voltage 20 Hz
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Measuring alarm
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 4 ... 100 Ohm in 1 Ohm steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 Seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
2% of impedance value
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1032
ANSI
MS212
Application
64G
C2,M,L
Stator earth fault function with stabilising against overvoltage- and overfrequency conditions.
MS212
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Stabilising voltage
Measured voltage
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Generator nominal voltage:
Nominal frequency:
Stabilising:
10 ... 25 V in 1 V steps
0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
70 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
16,7 ... 60 Hz in 0.1 Hz steps
0 ... 140 % in 1 % steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% Un
DID-001-1.02
Page 466 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1068
ANSI
MS213
Application
64G
C2,M,L
1 stage stator earth fault function with evaluation of the 3rd harmonic component.
MS213
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage generator busbar
Voltage generator neutral
Binary: Blocking input
Test input stage
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.2 ... 5,0 V in 0.1 V steps
Operating time: 0.1 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Balance: 0.20 ... 5.00 in 0.05 steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
1A
5A
3.I0A
3.I0A
I1
I2
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
3.I0A+ 29I0B
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
U0 nom. = 230V
G
3~
I0B
TEST
(opt.)
BLOCK.
(opt.)
3.I0B
NEUTRAL V.T.
TRANSF. &
NEUTRAL P.T.
RATIO:
1
3.U0
R0
3.I0B
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I8
OUT 09
I9
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
(NON-LINEAR)
PER 1 LAMP:
1,6A
230 [V]
230V
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
3.U0
GEN.
OUT 03
I3
1A
5A
18
PREFERABLY:
RING-TYPE C.T.
(CABLE SLIP-ON C.T.)
C.T. RATIO: 60A // 1A
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
1A
5A
2
3
BATT.
I10 INCREASED
SENSITIVITY/
SPECIAL C.T. RATIO: OUT 10
INPUT OF 1A GIVES A OUT 11
VE2-INTERNAL VALUE
OF 28,3A.
OUT 12
U1
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 13
U2
IN 01
IN 02
IN 03
IN 04
IN 05
IN 06
IN 07
OUT 17
OUT 18
OUT 19
OUT 20
OUT 21
OUT 22
OUT 23
OUT 24
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MODBUS
X2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RS422/485
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE
NOTE: U0 = UNEUTRAL / 3
IN 08
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
2 NOTE: I0 = INEUTRAL / 3
X7
3 VERSION OF RELAY: 1[A] (EXCEPT CURR.INPUT I10)
1
RELAY STOP OUT 32
4 SEC. CURRENT RATIO IS PLANT SPECIFIC
2
TRANSSI02
3
5 SEC. CURRENT RATIO IS PLANT SPECIFIC
DUCER 1
Tx+
4
TxEXAMPLE GIVEN FOR STANDARD APPLICATION
5
GND
6 NOTE: CURRENT INTPUT I10 SPECIAL RATIO
6
TRANSSI03
INTERMEDIATE C.T.7
DUCER 2
LEGEND:
+5
8
INSIDE DRS
Rx+
9
OPTIONAL MODULE:
RxCOMPACT 2
10
-UAKB
Transducer 1
GND
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
11
Transducer 2
Tx+
12
Shaft Current
Tx13
Rotor E/F
ROTOR E/F
SI01
14
CAN BUS
future use (hardware extension)
UAKBIN09
X9/X10
IEC870 5-103 control system interface DRS- FAULT
RS422/485
chain line data interface
CABLE
MODBUS
control system interface
no. TIDFRONTSIDE
006-RS 232
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 468 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.3.2 MS211
+ X1
G
20Hz
V20Hz
CTR
CL
BANDPASSFILTER
(20Hz)
RV
C.T.
VN
500
a
b
CG
TEST
(opt.)
BLOCK.
(opt.)
+
+
-
GEN.
UN
3
500V
(ALTERNATIVELY)
2 LOAD RESISTOR
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 07
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I20Hz
b
CS
1A
5A
29
VR
4
5
6
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKB
MAIN
TRANSF.
1A
5A
UAKBFAULT
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
20Hz-GENERATOR
1
2
3
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L2 L3
OPTIONAL MODULE
L1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
17.3.3 MS212
+ -
I>
m.c.b.
X1
IR
alternatively
RL non-linear
UR
MAIN
TRANSF.
IR
iL1
VMEASUR.
eL1
1
I1
GEN.
eL2
I2
EL2
I3
EL3
eL3
i L3
VSTABILIZ.
G
3~
P.T.
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) -
LEGEND:
1
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I8
OUT 06
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
X7
TAPPING: 60,8%
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
1A
5A
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TEST (opt.)
VDISPOSITION
4
5
6
29
iL2
EL1
1A
5A
UAKB
VL1L2
P.T.
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
RL linear
UR
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L2 L3
OPTIONAL MODULE
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 470 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.3.4 MS213
+ -
L3
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
BLOCK. (opt.) TEST (opt.)
P.T.
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
NOTE:
OUT 14
U3
ANY VOLTAGE
INPUT MAY BE
OUT 15
U4
USED
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 07
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 08
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
G
3~
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
U 0 neutral
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U 0 open delta
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
P.T.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
3.I0A +
3.I0A
I0
3.U0
U0
3.I0B
G
3~
GEN.
3.U0
3.I0A-3.I0B
V.T.
3.I0B
R (LOAD)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
87 Alarm
78 Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ANGLE BETWEEN U0 and I0
(NOTE: U0 = REF = 0)
NOTEBOOK
(SLO
PE +
90)
SLOPE 1
SET VALUE
0
90)
U0=
REF
I0
(SLO
PE 90)
U0 > set
set = DIR.1
TEST
0)
I0
[ ]
PE
(SLO
PE -
t=
se .2
R
DI
U0"
O
SL
t=
se .1
DIR
(SLO
PE +
9
I0"
EXAMPLE
GIVEN FOR
SET VALUE = 30
&
U0 > set
&
set = DIR.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
>=1
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
&
>=1
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
&
TRIP
FUNCTION
t > tset
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
TRIP
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
PE +
SL
90)
[]
SLOPE 1
SET VALUE
I0
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
t=
se .2
R
DI
I0
DIR.2
-90)
U0
(SLO
PE
(SLO
P
E
OP
t=
se .1
R
DI
E +9
0)
..
OUTPUT
(SLO
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
(SLO
PE -9
0)
1 EXAMPLE
GIVEN FOR
SET VALUE = 30
I0
U0
DISPLAY SHOWS +30
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
U0
30
I0
30
ANGLE BETWEEN U0 and I0
(NOTE: U0 = REF = 0)
180+30
U0
I0
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 474 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
SET SLOPE = 0
SET SLOPE = 30
DIR.2
O
SL
2
R.
DI
I0
U0
DIR.1
U0
SLOPE
R.
DI
I0
I0
PE
I0
SET SLOPE = 60
SET SLOPE = 90
DIR.1
SLOPE
SL
OP
DI
R.
1
I0
I0
U0
U0
I0
RI D
I0
DI
R.
2
.2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUTZONE
MAIN
TRANSF.
C.T.
(TERMINAL
SIDE)
3.I0A
3.I0A
3.I0A+ 3.I0B
X1/
19
20
I 10 I0
3.U0
X8/
1
2
U 1 U0
3.I0B
UL3
INZONE
UL2
UL1
GEN.
G
3~
C.T.
(NEUTRAL
SIDE)
3.I0B
V.T.
3.U0
3.I0B
R0
DEF. OF PHASORS:
L1
NORMAL OPERATION:
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OF NEUTRAL P.T.:
UL3L1
UL1L2
UL1
RESIDUAL CURRENT:
UL3
L3
UL2
L2
3.I0A = 0
3.I0B = 0
3.I0A - 3.I0B = 0
UL2L3
UL1 = UL1-0 = UL1 - 0
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
DID-001-1.02
Page 476 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUTZONE
MAIN
TRANSF.
C.T.
(TERMINAL
SIDE)
3.I0A
3.I0A
3.I0A- 3.I0B
X1/
19
20
I 10 I0
3.U0
X8/
1
2
U 1 U0
3.I0B
2
IL1
IL2
IL3
UL3
INZONE
UL2
UL1
GEN.
G
3~
C.T.
(NEUTRAL
SIDE)
P.T.
V.T.
3.U0
(OHMIC/
NON-LINEAR)
PHASORS AT SEC.
SIDE OF V.T./C.T.:
I 0A
3.
.I 0 B
-3
UL2
NOTE:
IL1 = IL2 = 0
IL3 = -3.I0B
NOTE:
AT
PRIM.SIDE OF C.T.s
L1
I 0B
3.
0A
1
3.I
U0
3.
R0
3.I0B
3.I0B
UL1
UL2
L3
E NOTE: L3 = E/F
L2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
OUTZONE
MAIN
TRANSF.
C.T.
(TERMINAL
SIDE)
3.I0A =0
3.I0A =0
IL1
X1/
19
20
X8/
1
2
IL3
IL2
3.I0B
3.U0
I 10 I0
3
U 1 U0
UL3
INZONE
UL2
UL1
GEN.
3.I0B
G
3~
C.T.
(NEUTRAL
SIDE)
P.T.
V.T.
3.U0
3.I0B
3.I0B
NOTE:
IL1 = IL2 = 0
IL3 = -3.I0B
NOTE:
R0
(OHMIC/
NON-LINEAR)
AT
PRIM.SIDE OF C.T.s
.I 0B
.I 0B
-3
-3
A
I0
3.
PHASORS AT SEC.
SIDE OF V.T./C.T.:
L1
I 0B
3.
U0
3.
UL1
E NOTE: L3 = E/F
UL2
L3
UL2
L2
DID-001-1.02
Page 478 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUTZONE
MAIN
TRANSF.
E/F
OUTZONE
X1/
19
20
X8/
1
2
3.I0A
3.I0A
3.I0A- 3.I0B
C.T.
3.I0B
E/F 2
INZONE
INZONE
3.U0
I 10 I0
3
U 1 U0
3.I0B
GEN.
G
3~
C.T.
(NEUTRAL
SIDE)
P.T.
V.T.
3.U0
3.I0B
3.I0B
R0
(OHMIC/
NON-LINEAR)
E/F OUTZONE
DRS RECORDED CURVES
E/F INZONE
DRS RECORDED CURVES
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
17.4.2 MS211
L2 L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
20Hz-GENERATOR
MAIN
TRANSF.
G
20Hz
-A-A
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz
CTR
V20Hz
3
fN = 20Hz
BANDPASSFILTER
(20Hz)
RV
CL
2
R
VR
C.T.
I20Hz
b
CS
PROCESSING
L1
20Hz
VN
500
a
CG
GEN.
TEST
(optional)
UN
3
1
500V
BLOCKING
(optional)
LEGEND:
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
MEASUR. VOLTAGE
MEASUR. CURRENT
NOTEBOOK
V20Hz
FIRMWARE
BAND-PASSFILTER
2nd ORDER
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
FIRMWARE
BAND-PASSFILTER
2nd ORDER
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
FIRMWARE
LOW-PASS
FILTER/ TIME
CONST =
5 * PERIOD =
250ms
FFT1. HARM.
(20Hz)
FIRMWARE
LOW-PASS
FILTER/ TIME
CONST =
5 * PERIOD =
250ms
FFT1. HARM.
(20Hz)
I20Hz
FIRMWARE
BAND-PASSFILTER
2nd ORDER
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
FIRMWARE
BAND-PASSFILTER
2nd ORDER
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
|Z| =
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
I
N
G
| V20Hz (1.Harm.) |
| I20Hz (1.Harm.) |
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t>
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
ALARM
>=1
&
BLOCKING
&
ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
LEDMATRIX
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MS211 STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 17-14
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MS211
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
MEASUR. VOLTAGE
MEASUR. CURRENT
BAND-PASSFILTER
2nd ORDER
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
LOW-PASS FILTER/
TIME CONST =
5 * PERIOD = 250ms
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 482 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2 L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
20Hz-GENERATOR
G
20Hz
MAIN
TRANSF.
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz
CTR
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz
PROCESSING
L1
BANDPASSFILTER
(20Hz)
RV
CL
2
R
VR
I20Hz
C.T.
1
b
CS
20Hz
VN
500
a
CG
no E/F:
GEN.
TEST
3
(optional)
UN
3
1
500V
CE
20Hz
gen.
BLOCKING
(optional)
RV=8O (see
bandpassfilter)
E/F:
LEGEND:
1 OPEN DELTA or NEUTRAL V.T. (ALTERNATIVELY)
2 LOAD RESISTOR
3 FFT-SYNCHRONIZING CHANNEL = 20Hz (19,9...20,1Hz)
3
5
E/F
CE
20Hz
gen.
USE CAUTION!
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
of 20Hz-generator (electronic
generator module) has to be switched off
during maintenance works at stator winding.
DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM
Example: switch off m.c.b. (m.c.b. must
DIGITAL PROTECTION
RELAYcontact which is used for:
have a signalling
TYPE: DRS COMPACT
a) blocking2of 20Hz-protection
and
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2 b) to forward an alarm to the power station
control system.).
LEGEND:
1 CE = CTR + CL + CS + CG + )
2 R...LOAD RESISTOR
3 RV...SERIES RESISTANCE (INSIDE OF
BANDPASS-FILTER-MODULE)
4 20Hz-GENERATOR-MODULE
5 E/F between GEN-NEUTRAL and
EARTH resp. GEN-PHASE and EARTH
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
AUX. SUPPLY (alternatively):
V = 3x80...130V AC ph-ph
50 / 60Hz
V12
1 2 3 4
V = 80...265V AC
50 / 60Hz
V23
V = 88...253V DC
+
-
V31
1A1 1A2
1A1 1A2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
fN = 20Hz
L2 L3
G
20Hz
MAIN
TRANSF.
V20Hz
CTR
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz
PROCESSING
L1
I20Hz
CL
NOTE:
POWER CONSUMPTION OF 20Hz-GENERATOR :
=110 VA.
NOTE:
20Hz-GENERATOR OUTPUT-VOLTAGE:
delayed up to 1min if supply voltage rises slowly.
NOTE:
20Hz-GENERATOR OUTPUT-POWER:
75VA max. const.
NOTE:
20HZ-GENERATOR HEAT-LOSSES:
20W.
VR
C.T.
1
b
CS
20Hz
VN
500
a
CG
GEN.
TEST
(optional)
UN
3
1
500V
MS211
STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz LOGIC DIAGRAM
BLOCKING
page
2/3: DETAIL: AUX. POWER SUPPLY
5
(optional)
Fig. 17-17
DID-001-1.02
Page 484 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz
L2 L3
PROCESSING
L1
G
20Hz
MAIN
TRANSF.
V20Hz
CTR
I20Hz
fN = 20Hz
CL
R
VR
C.T.
b
CS
20Hz
VN
500
a
CG
b
1
GEN.
TEST
(optional)
UN
3
1
500V
IMPORTANT NOTE:
MS211 must be blocked in case of
loss of aux. supply voltage of
20Hz-generator:
1. Vaux. supply = VDC:
BLOCKING
(optional)
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
17.4.3 MS212
L1
L2 L3
RL linear
UR
I>
m.c.b
IR
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
alternatively
RL non-linear
UR
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
-A
IR
VMEASUR.
iL1
eL1
P.T.
eL2
I1
I2
iL3
eL3
EL2
VSTABILIZ.
EL3
P.T.
VG L3
VG L2
GEN.
3~
VG L1
I3
iL2
EL1
VG L1
EL1
VDISPOSITION
EL3
VDISPOSITION
VG L2
EL2
VG L3
Generator Neutral
LEGEND:
1 NOTE: DEF. OF DIRECTIONS
OF PHASORS (REFERENCE:
SEE PHASORS SHOWN IN
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM) WERE
CHOOSEN IN SUCH WAY TO
GET THE GEN. NEUTRAL
POT. AND THE EARTH POT.
AS SHOWN IN THIS
VECTOR GRAPHICS.
2 TAPPING AT PHASE L2:
60,8%
3 LOAD RESISTOR (LINEAR
OR NON-LINEAR)
2 + 3 IN ORDER TO SHIFT
AWAY THE GEN. NEUTRAL
FROM EARTH-POT.
VDISPOSITION 100% STATOR
E/F PROT.
4 VOLTAGE PHASOR
DIAGRAM OF THE
WINDINGS OF THE
SYNCHR.GEN
DRS
VCRITICAL
WINDING
79
78
77
VG L1
VDISPOSITION
76
75
VG L3
2
85 86
74
99
98
87
96
97
88
89
VG L2
90
TEST
TRIP
COMMANDS
(optional)
OUTPUT
BLOCKING
CONTACTS
(optional)
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
VMEASUR.
|VMEASUR.| > ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
SETTING:
OPERATE VALUE
ACTUAL
OPERATE
VALUE
1
(V / Hz) / (Vn / Hzn)
VSTABILIZ.
SETTING: NOM.
GEN. VOLT.
TEST
SETTING: NOM.
FREQUENCY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
SETTING:
BIAS
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
ALARM
>=1
BLOCKING
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
t>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
&
1
0
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MS212
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
(V / Hz) / (Vn / Hzn)
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
Characteristic/Diagram:
see Fig. MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% TRIP CHARACTERISTIC
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-indications of
PROCESSING-board
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 488 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
TRIP CHARACTERISTIC
[PROCESSING (VE2) ONLY]
SET VALUE:
BIAS = 140%
2,4
BIAS = 100%
2
BIAS = 50%
1,5
BIAS = 0%
0,5
1
ACT. GEN. VOLT.
NOM. GEN. VOLT.
FORMULA:
(ACT. OPER. VALUE) = (SET OPER. VALUE) * [1 + (BIAS) * (UG/UG nom * fG/fG nom - 1)]
CONDITION:
IF [UG < UG nom] use UG = UG nom!
IF [fG < fG nom] use fG = fG nom!
NOTE: THIS FORMULA IS VALID FOR VE2 ONLY! (DOES NOT APPLY FOR VE1).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
17.4.4 MS213
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
U 0 open delta
U 0 neutral
P.T.
U4
U5
G
3~
GEN.
P.T.
GEN. MUST
NOT BE
EARTHED
(NO NEUTRAL
GROUNDING
RESISTOR)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CB1
CB2
64 Alarm
64 Trip
DID-001-1.02
Page 490 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
3rd HARMONIC OF U 0 open delta
3rd HARMONIC OF U 0 neutral
NOTEBOOK
3. HARMONIC
1. HARMONIC
U 0 open delta
CALCULATION OF
3rd HARMONIC
(|U 0 open delta |)
(RATIO)
3. HARMONIC
SET VALUE:
RATIO
U 0 neutral
(|U 0 neutral|)
CALCULATION OF
3rd HARMONIC
+
-
ALARM
TEST
LEDDISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
>=1
&
BLOCKING
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
&
>=1
ALARM
&
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
FUNCTION
t > tset
1
0
TRIP
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MS213 STATOR E/F 3rd HARMONIC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 17-24
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MS213
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION OF
3rd HARMONIC
SET VALUE:
RATIO
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 492 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.5 FUNCTION
17.5.1 MS111
The directional stator earth fault protection is detecting earth faults in the stator winding of
3 phase rotating machines and the associated galvanic connected plant. The selective earth
fault protection range is approximately 10% from the generator neutral up to the generator leads
where the cable slip-on CTs are positioned.
The directional stator earth fault protection is using the zero sequence voltage- and the zero
sequence current components for earth fault detection. The zero sequence voltage value serves
as an initiation quantity whereas the phase displacement between the zero sequence current and
the zero sequence voltage determines whether there is an out of zone- or an in-zone fault.
In case of an earth a neutral displacement voltage is produced in the secondary open delta VT
circuit with a value depending on the location of the fault in the generator winding. The configured
trigger level of the zero sequence voltage determines the protective range of the stator earth fault
function.
The zero sequence voltage is also producing a fault current via the earth fault path from all other
external plant connections whereby the current value depends on the respective zero sequence
impedance of the equipment. The phase displacement of the zero sequence current for the
protected generator is measured by the cable slip-on CTs.
From above it can now be deduced that the earth fault is an in-zone fault when voltage and current
are in phase. Since the zero sequence current has not only a resistive component a
permissible range of 60 (= Direction 1) is applicable. However, other locations of the CT/VT
installation are sometimes necessary which will result in a different phase angle displacement
between voltage and current, i.e. a phase angle >60 (= Direction 2) is selected.
The protection algorithm for the function samples the parameter signals 12 times each cycle.
For each sample interval the value and phase angle of the signals is computed according to
standard procedures.
The voltage signal is compared with the configured operating value of the function. At the same
time the phase angle Direction 1 or Direction 2 is computed and compared with the configured
tripping direction. When both criteria are fulfilled during 24 consecutive sample intervals the
function is initiated and the trip time delay started. In case the initiating conditions remain during the
whole time delay a trip output signal is produced.
Initiation and at the same time a possible trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive sample
intervals (3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip signal extension).
Note:
The external equipment such as distribution transformers and loading resistor
shown in the circuit diagrams are individually designed for each plant according
to the calculations outlined in publication MA 553-7/87e.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
17.5.2 MS211
a)
Alarm "Measuring Fault" when V < 10V.
b)
Initiation delay: 380 ms (due to filtering).
c)
Initiation delay on pick-up: 700 ms.
d)
Time delay of Measuring Fault alarm: 640 ms.
e)
Drop-off delay Measuring Fault alarm: 440 ms.
f)
The Central Processing Unit PROCESSING has to be configured to a nominal frequency
of approximately 19.9 20.1 Hz.
Note:
Do not use a wider range! With a Fluke multimeter the frequency of the 20 Hz
generator has to be measured and a narrow as possible range adjusted!
The frequency configuration in Page0 must not be set to 50 Hz.
g)
Must not be applied together with oversampling functions!
DID-001-1.02
Page 494 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.5.3 MS212
The stator earth fault protection enables detection of earth faults in the stator winding of rotating
machines and the galvanic connected plant portions which are part of the generator-transformer LV
system.
The protection is based on a method which produces an approximate 15% primary voltage
displacement of the phase to neutral voltage and does not require any special auxiliary equipment
but solely passive plant components. This small displacement voltage of the generator neutral does
practically not impose an additional burden to the winding insulation.
The earth fault protection covers 100% of the machine winding including the neutral and in
case of an earth fault only a small additional primary current is circulating through the fault
path, i.e. generally smaller than 5 A.
Due to the unsymmetrical connection of the distribution transformers also the generator neutral
is displaced with respect to ground potential thereby ensuring that also earth faults at the neutral
are definitely detected.
For the design and required ratings of the distribution transformers and the secondary loading
impedance there are versions with loading resistors and high interruption capacity miniature CBs
available. For details please refer to Publication MA 553-7/87e.
The generator neutral displacement voltage under normal operating conditions is essentially
depending on the generator system capacitance to ground and during overspeed- and/or
overvoltage conditions during a full load rejection or regulator failure may increase up to the
set operating value.
This is particularly the case when a relative small operating value has been selected ensuring
decisive operation at a generator voltage even at approximately 50% to cover the required
100% protection of the winding.
In order to keep a sufficient safety margin and to prevent mal-operation the operating value Va
of the function is temporarily increased by a configurable stabilising factor k from the initial
Ve value according to following formula:
Formula for PROCESSING (VE1):
Ua
U 2
g +1
f
gn
2
= Ue 1 + k
. 1.
2
fn
Ua =Ue
Ua =Ue
k .......
Vg .....
Vgn ...
f ........
fn ......
for VgVgn
and
for fgfgn
for Vg<Vgn
for fg<fgn
Stabilising factor
Generator voltage
Generator nominal voltage
Generator frequency
Generator nominal frequency
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 496 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.5.4 MS213
Note:
VLeads and VNeutral must have opposite polarity to enable V=0.
Frequency range (generator overspeed):
a) Approximately +/- 10% in case of no synchronising channel is detected.
b) With active synchronising channel also a range f = 90 160 % is possible.
Do not combine with oversampling functions!
V3T
Neutral Point
Terminals
V3N
In case of an earth fault the 3rd harmonic component in the neutral is shorted whereby the value at
the generator leads is increased by the same prior value.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
V3T
Neutral Point
Terminals
V3N=0
The above described distribution of the 3rd harmonic over neutral and terminal side is taken for the
evaluation of earth faults close to the generator neutral.
DID-001-1.02
Page 498 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
17.6.1 MS111
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry.
Also the function parameters have to be set according to the data of the stator system.
The function outputs for the LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured
according to requirements.
Function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
Insert an ammeter into the current circuit, a voltmeter onto the voltage input and a phase angle
meter into the test circuit and with a relay test set inject the appropriate quantities.
Compare the meter indication with the external measured value display of the VE.
Based on the system calculations inject the minimum operating earth fault current by also
applying a voltage and adjust the phase angle to the operating range. Increase the voltage
until the function operates and record this value into the test sheets.
Reduce the test voltage until the function resets and record the value in the commissioning
sheets.
Compare the operating value with the set protective range and then increase the earth fault current
up to 1.5 times the minimum setting and also raise the displacement voltage to about
1.5 times the pick-up level.
Alter the phase angle between voltage and current in the + and direction until the function resets
either way and record these operating values into the commissioning sheets.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and the LED indication according to the configured settings
and the circuit diagrams.
At 1.5 times the initiation value verify the function time delay with a suitable timer and enter
the results into the commissioning test sheets.
Check the configured function blocks for each stage by applying the blocking signal when the
protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test feature for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external input quantities.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
S(%) = 1
S
VAG
VNG
UAG
.100
UNG
Protection range in %
Generator voltage initiating value
Generator nominal voltage
Check any possible configured external function blocking inputs from the plant.
Restore the trip outputs of the stator earth fault protection.
If possible shut down the generator via a live protective function trip and remove
the ground test connection.
Re-configure any possible parameter changes to the original values.
- Out Of Zone Earth Fault Test:
Block trips of the stator earth fault protection.
Connect a cable with suitable cross section, e.g. a safety earth, between a generator
phase and ground outside the protected zone..
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation only so far as to
prove restraint of the protective function with due consideration of the short time rating
of the earthing equipment.
Record the voltage and current values in the commissioning sheets.
Shut down the generator and remove the ground test connection.
DID-001-1.02
Page 500 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.6.2 MS212
Pre-Commissioning:
At first check the external cable connections and the primary bus connections of the distribution
transformers as well as the other external auxiliary devices.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external wiring.
The parameters for the operating values and the time delay are to be set to the designed values.
The function outputs for the LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured
according to requirements.
Function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
Insert voltmeters on the neutral displacement input and the generator voltage input (= stabilising
voltage) and with a suitable relay test set carry out following secondary injection test.
Raise the neutral displacement voltage value and keep the stabilising voltage at zero until the
protective function operates.
Record the operating value with the remark "No stabilising Voltage" in the test sheets by also
comparing the instrument readings with the external Measured Values display of the VE.
Reduce the test voltage until the function resets and record the value.
Repeat the above tests with following stabilising voltage values:
-
Compare the test results with above formula and record the measured values in the test sheets.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and also the LED indications according to configuration and circuit
diagrams.
At 1.5 times the trigger value measure the operating time with a suitable timer and record the result
into the commissioning test sheets.
Check the configured function blocks for each stage by applying the blocking signal when the
protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test feature for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external input quantities.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 502 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
17.6.3 MS213
Pre-conditions:
It should be ensured that the function input voltages are to be measured as exact as possible
and it is not advisable to connect the VT neutral measuring instruments to the station earth system
since there may be a potential difference which can cause a considerable deviation
from the real values.
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 504 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Table Evaluation:
It is recommended to draw a diagram where the number of tests are entered in the X-axis.
In the Y-axis the sum of the 3rd harmonic is entered for each test.
Subsequently all earth fault test values are combined to form a graph and the same way all
open circuit- and/or on-load test values.
Result: 2 graphs which are representing all permissible generator operating conditions with
or without an earth fault.
Between the two graphs a straight line, with Y = constant, is positioned which should have a
sufficient safety margin from the curves. Finally this obtained Y-value is used as the function
operating value setting.
Should it not be possible to find a line which is not crossing one of the curves then a solution
by altering the Bias Setting value could be obtained.
If still not successful the plausibility of the curves should be investigated. Especially the
VT grounding should be checked to ensure that there are no false readings due to earth
potential shifts.
In some particular cases it may happen that the generator characteristic is almost symmetrical
which then will produce almost no or a too small 3rd harmonic component.
Note:
The generator characteristic symmetry greatly depends on the manufacturing tolerances and
therefore it is required to determine protection settings for each generator by separate tests.
DID-001-1.02
Page 506 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
18.1 OVERVIEW
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MT . . .
FNNR TYPE
VT supervision 2 phase
Vector sum of the 2 phase voltage inputs
Only applicable for phase to neutral voltages
Note: No outputs to trip matrix
but common alarm annunciation is provided
1103
ANSI
MT212
Application
1101
MT312
C2,M,L
1107
MT315
C2,M,L
1104
MT313
C2,M,L
1108
MT317
C2,M,L
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
VT supervision 2 phase
Vector sum of the 2 phase voltage inputs
Only applicable for phase to neutral voltages
Note: No outputs to trip matrix
but common alarm annunciation is provided
1103
ANSI
MT212
Application
C2,M,L
MT212
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system L1 (phase to neutral phase to phase voltage)
Voltage system L3 (phase to neutral phase to phase voltage)
Outputs
Red alarm LED 1st row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 5 ... 50 V in 1 V steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 508 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1101
ANSI
MT312
Application
C2,M,L
MT312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage phase L1
Voltage phase L2
Voltage phase L3
Outputs
Red alarm LED 1st row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 5 ... 50 V in 1 V steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1107
ANSI
MT315
Application
C2,M,L
MT315
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage phase L1
Voltage phase L2
Voltage phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row: DRS fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: VT fault.
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 5 ... 90 V in 1 V steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Fault evaluation: Yes / No
DID-001-1.02
Page 510 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1104
ANSI
MT313
Application
C2,M,L
MT313
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Phase to phase voltage L2-L3
Phase to phase voltage L3-L1
Outputs
Red fault LED, 1st row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 5 ... 50 V in 1 V steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Phase rotation: Right / Left
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 512 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
18.2.5 Inverse Time VT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection, With Optional VT Fault LED
Indication
FNNR TYPE
1108
ANSI
MT317
Application
C2,M,L
MT317
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Phase to phase voltage L2-L3
Phase to phase voltage L3-L1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row: DRS fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: VT fault.
Setting Parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Fault evaluation:
Phase rotation:
5 ... 50 V in 1 V steps
1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Yes / No
Right / Left
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 514 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
T
X1
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
I5
I6
U R-T
U T-0
UT
G
2~
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I8
I9
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OPTIONAL MODULE
LEGEND:
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U R-0
IR
OUT 04
I4
29
UR
GEN.
1A
5A
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) -
MT315 only!
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TEST (opt.)
OUT 08
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE
G
3~
GEN.
DRSOUT 06
DRSCOMPACT2
2A OUT 07
COMPACT
I8
UAKB
U L3
OUT 05
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 516 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ L3
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
I5
I6
G
3~
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
MT317 only!
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 09
I9
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
OUT 08
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
UAKB
U L3L1
OUT 04
I4
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
T
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
U R-0
U R-T
GEN.
U T-0
G
2~
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 518 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
| 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | =
= | 2 * I 0 | = | IR + IT |
NOTEBOOK
IR
IT
CALCULATION OF (2 * I0) =
= | 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | =
= | IR + I T |
t>
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
X2
4
5
see WIRING
DIAGRAM!
PROCESSING
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 18-5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MT211
Online simulation
via notebook
CALCULATION OF (2 * U0) =
= 2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
= UR + UT
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF PROCESSING/
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
UR + UT = 2 * U0.
X2
4
5
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 520 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
T
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
V R-T
VT
G
2~
GEN.
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I2
I3
OUT 03
I1
OUT 04
I4
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I5
I6
I7
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
VR
VT
IR
1A
5A
29
VR
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LEGEND:
1
WRONG POLARITY: VT
WIRE BROKEN: VR
WIRE BROKEN: VT
VOLTAGES
PHASE-PHASE
VR
VT
50V
50V
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
V0 =
(VR + VT) / 2
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
5
|2 * V0| = 2 *
|ZERO.SEQU.VOLT.|
0V
0V
25V
50V
25V
50V
50V
100V
VR
EXAMPLE no. 1
VT
2
EXAMPLE no. 2
0V
VR=0
50V
VT
VR
EXAMPLE no. 3
EXAMPLE no. 4
50V
0V
VT=0
50V
50V
VR
VT
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
R
T
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
V R-T
V T-R
VT
EXAMPLE no. 1
EXAMPLE no. 2
EXAMPLE no. 3
EXAMPLE no. 4
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
V R-T
IR
G
2~
1A
5A
29
VR
GEN.
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LEGEND:
1
VOLTAGES
PHASE-PHASE
VR-T
VT-R
100V
100V
0V
100V
100V
0V
100V
100V
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
VR-T
V0 =
(VR-T + VT-R) / 2
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
5
|2 * V0| = 2 *
|ZERO.SEQU.VOLT.|
0V
0V
50V
100V
50V
100V
100V
200V
VT-R
VR-T= 0 VT-R
VR-T
VR-T
VT-R = 0
VT-R
DID-001-1.02
Page 522 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
L1
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
50 ALARM
50 TRIP
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
| 3 * U0 | =
3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
= RESIDUAL VOLTAGE
NOTEBOOK
U L1
U L2
U L3
CALCULATION OF (3 * U0) =
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE):
= 3 * U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
| 3 * U0 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
IF:
MT315
IF:
MT312
IF:
MT315
t>
>=1
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
TEST
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
X2
4
5
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
BL.
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
ALARM
&
1
0
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
t>
LEDMATRIX
ALARM
TRIP
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
1
0
APPLlES FOR
MT312 ONLY
TRIP
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
2
APPLlES FOR
MT315 ONLY
DID-001-1.02
Page 524 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
CALCULATION OF (3 * U0) =
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE):
= 3 * U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
IF:
MT315
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
IF:
MT312
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSINGboard
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
U L1
U L2
U L3
I6
2
3
VOLTAGES
UL1-0
EXAMPLE no. 2
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
STATUS Ok.
1 WIRE BROKEN
1 PHASE MISSING
DISPLAY SHOWS:
3 * U0 = 57,7V.
4
5
PHASE-GROUND
UL2-0
UL3-0
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
|UL1-0 + UL2-0 +
UL3-0| / 3 = |U0|
NOTEBOOK
DISPLAY:
3 * U0
UL1-0
57,7V
57,7V
57,7V
UL3-0
OUT 05
LEGEND:
1
EXAMPLE no. 1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 16
G
3~
OUT 04
I4
I5
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
GEN.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
1
2
3
BATT.
0V
0V
57,7V / 3
57,7V
57,7V / 3
57,7V
173,2V / 3
173,2V
UL2-0
UL1-0
57,7V
57,7V
0V
UL2-0
EXAMPLE no. 3
EXAMPLE no. 4
57,7V
0V
0V
57,7V
57,7V
57,7V
UL1-0
UL1-0
UL3-0
UL2-0
EXAMPLE
Fig. 18-12
DID-001-1.02
Page 526 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
G
3~
GEN.
TEST
MT317 only!
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
60 Alarm
60 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
MT317 only!
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|U2| =
= (NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.) =
= NPS-VOLTAGE
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
CALCULATION OF
NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.:
= |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3 =
= |U2|
|U2| > (OPERATE VALUE)
IF:
MT317
IF:
MT313
t>
IF:
MT317
>=1
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING/
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
TEST
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
X2
4
5
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
BL.
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
ALARM
&
1
0
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
t>
LEDMATRIX
ALARM
TRIP
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
1
0
APPLlES FOR
MT313 ONLY
TRIP
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
2
APPLlES FOR
MT317 ONLY
DID-001-1.02
Page 528 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
CALCULATION OF
NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.:
= |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3 =
= |U2|
IF:
MT317
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
IF:
MT313
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSINGboard
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
LEGEND:
1
2
3
VOLTAGES
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I5
OUT 16
G
3~
EXAMPLE no. 1
OUT 04
I4
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
GEN.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
1
2
3
BATT.
PHASE-PHASE
VL1L2
VL2L3
VL3L1
100V
100V
100V
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
VL3L1
V2 =
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
5
(VL1L2 + a.VL2L3 +
|V2| =
a.VL3L1) / 3
|NEG.PH.SEQU.VOLT.|
VL1L2
0V
0V
33,3V
33,3V
50V
50V
100V
100V
VL2L3
2
EXAMPLE no. 2
0V
100V
100V
VL3L1
VL1L2
=0
VL2L3
3
EXAMPLE no. 3
EXAMPLE no. 4
approx.
50V
100V
100V
100V
approx.
50V
100V
VL3L1 VL1L2
VL2L3
VL3L1
VL2L3
VL1L2
EXAMPLE
Fig. 18-16
DID-001-1.02
Page 530 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
18.5 FUNCTION
General Basics:
VT supervision functions are applied for the internal DRS monitoring features to check the VT
external plant circuits but also to verify the correct internal signal processing.
Monitoring is based on the fact that in high voltage systems under normal operating conditions
there are no negative phase sequence- or zero sequence components except for the duration
of system disturbances or faults.
All function analogue signals are sampled 12 times each cycle. Via Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
corresponding vectors (value and phase angle) for the 1st harmonic are determined.
At each sample interval the CPU evaluates the zero sequence- or NPS system and compares
whether the initiating conditions are above the operating setting. If the initiating conditions are
exceeding the set values during 24 consecutive samples (= 2 cycles) then the time delay is started.
After the configured time delay expiry the fault alarm is given and in the DRS fault
status the condition CT/VT Fault entered.
VT Supervision.
Differences Between the Various Functions.
MT212 evaluates:
MT312 evaluates:
MT315:
MT313 evaluates:
MT317:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
18.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections.
The parameters for the operating value and time delay have to be set to the designed values.
For the "VT Test 3 Phase, " function also the corresponding phase rotation has to be configured.
Function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
Single phase inject 1.1 times the voltage operating value into the system. By correct function
response after the set time delay following annunciations occur.
Fault alarm category 1
Fault indication, i.e. red "Fault" LED flashing
With protective functions MT315 and MT317 additionally also the configured LEDs
and outputs are activated.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read out the
entry " CT/VT Fault".
Switch off the injected test voltage and reset the fault alarm operating the blue reset key until
the yellow and red LED row indication is altering alternatively.
DID-001-1.02
Page 532 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
19 MT... CT SUPERVISION
19.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MT . . . CT Supervision Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MT . . .
FNNR TYPE
CT supervision 2 phase
current sum evaluation
Note: No outputs to trip matrix
Only common fault alarm
1102
ANSI
MT211
Application
1100
MT311
C2,M,L
1105
MT314
C2,M,L
1106
MT316
C2,M,L
1109
MT318
C2,M,L
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
CT supervision 2 phase
Current sum evaluation
Note: No outputs to trip matrix
Only common fault alarm
1102
ANSI
MT211
Application
C2,M,L
MT211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L3
Outputs
Red fault LED, 1st row : DRS Fault
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters
Operating value: 0.10 ... 0.50 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 534 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1100
ANSI
MT311
Application
C2,M,L
MT311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Outputs
Red fault LED, 1st row : DRS Fault
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters
Operating value: 0.10 ... 0.50 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1106
ANSI
MT316
Application
C2,M,L
Current sum evaluation of a 3 pole CT set for symmetry (3 x zero sequence current),
Y connection with optional CT supervision (Fault LED Indication).
MT314
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Red fault LED, 1st row : DRS Fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: CT fault.
Setting parameters
Operating value: 0.1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Fault evaluation: Yes / No
DID-001-1.02
Page 536 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1105
ANSI
MT314
Application
C2,M,L
MT314
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Note: This phase current is not directly measured but obtained by
a suitable external connection method (L3 = -L1-L2 )
Outputs
Red fault LED, 1st row : DRS Fault
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters
Operating value: 0.10 ... 0.50 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Phase rotation: Right / Left
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 538 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
19.2.5 Inverse Time CT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection with Optional LED Fault
Indication
FNNR TYPE
1109
ANSI
MT318
Application
C2,M,L
MT318
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Note: This phase current is not directly measured but obtained by
a suitable external connection method (L3 = -L1-L2 )
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Red fault LED, 1st row : DRS Fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation")
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters
Operating value:
Operating time:
Fault evaluation:
Phase rotation:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In
DID-001-1.02
Page 540 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
T
X1
IR
1
2
3
1A
5A
IT
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
IR
I5
I6
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 06
I8
UAKB
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LEGEND:
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 04
I4
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
2~
OUT 03
I3
29
IT
GEN.
I2
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
MAIN
TRANSF.
I1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
MAIN
TRANSF.
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
MT316 only!
I9
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 12
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 07
OUT 09
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
I8
UAKB
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
3~
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
GEN.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 542 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
MAIN
TRANSF.
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
MT318 only!
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
OUT 12
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
I8
UAKB
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) -
OUT 05
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TEST (opt.)
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
3~
OUT 03
I3
29
GEN.
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
T
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
IR
IT
GEN.
G
2~
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 544 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
= | 2 * U0 | = | UR + UT |
NOTEBOOK
UR
UT
CALCULATION OF (2 * U0) =
= 2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
= UR + UT
t>
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
X2
4
5
see WIRING
DIAGRAM!
PROCESSING
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 19-5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MT211
Online simulation
via notebook
CALCULATION OF (2 * I0) =
= | 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | =
= | IR + IT |
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF PROCESSING/
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
IR + IT = 2 * I0.
X2
4
5
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 546 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ -
X1
IR
1
2
3
1A
5A
IT
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
MAIN
TRANSF.
IR
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
29
IT
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
LEGEND:
1
G
2~
GEN.
2
3
4
5
PHASE
CURRENTS
measured:
IR
measured:
IT
1A
1A
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
I0 =
(IR + IT) / 2
NOTEBOOK 5
DISPLAY:
|2 * I0| = |ZERO
SEQU.CURR.|
0A
0A
0,5A
1A
0,5A
1A
1A
2A
IR
EXAMPLE no. 1
IT
2
EXAMPLE no. 2
IR = 0
0A
1A
1A
0A
1A
1A
IT
IR
EXAMPLE no. 3
EXAMPLE no. 4
IT = 0
IR
IT
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
I L1
I L2
I L3
G
3~
GEN.
TEST
MT316 only!
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
60 Alarm
60 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
MT316 only!
DID-001-1.02
Page 548 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
= |3 * I0 | =
3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) =
RESIDUAL CURRENT
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
CALCULATION OF (3 * I0) =
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT)
= 3 * I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
IF:
MT316
IF:
MT311
1
t>
2
IF:
MT316
>=1
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
X2
4
5
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
LEDDISPLAY
BL.
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
ALARM
&
ALARM
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
>=1
&
t>
LEDMATRIX
TRIP
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
1
0
1 APPLlES FOR
MT311 ONLY
TRIP
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
2 APPLlES FOR
MT316 ONLY
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION OF (3 * I0) =
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT)
= 3 * I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
IF:
MT311
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
IF:
MT316
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSINGboard
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 550 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ L1
L2
L3
I L1
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
MAIN
TRANSF.
I1
I2
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
G
3~
PHASE
CURRENTS
IL1
IL2
IL3
1A
1A
1A
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
29
GEN.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
1
2
3
BATT.
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
|I0| =
(IL1 + IL2
+ IL3) / 3
NOTEB. DISPLAY:
|3 * I0| = 3 * |ZERO.
SEQU.CURR.|
0A
0A
0,33A
1A
0,33A
1A
0A
0A
IL1
1
EXAMPLE no. 1
IL3
2
EXAMPLE no. 2
EXAMPLE no. 3
0A
1A
1A
0A
0A
1A
1A
1A
1A
IL2
IL1 = 0
IL3
IL2
IL1 = IL2 = 0
IL3
IL1
EXAMPLE no. 4
IL2
IL3
LEGEND:
1
2
3
4
EXAMPLE
Fig. 19-11
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
I L1
1
I L2
- (I L1 + I L2)
2
G
3~
GEN.
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
MT318 only!
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
60 Alarm
60 Trip
LEGEND:
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
MT318 only!
DID-001-1.02
Page 552 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT)
= | I2 |
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
I L3
CALCULATION OF I2 =
= (NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR.)
= (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3
Note: a = e j.2 / 3
| 3 * I2 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
2
IF:
MT318
1
IF:
MT314
t>
IF:
MT318
>=1
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31
X2
4
5
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31
LEDDISPLAY
BL.
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
ALARM
&
1
0
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
t>
LEDMATRIX
ALARM
TRIP
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
&
1
0
APPLlES FOR
MT314 ONLY
TRIP
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
2
APPLlES FOR
MT318 ONLY
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
CALCULATION OF I2 =
= (NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR.)
= (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3
Note: a = e j.2/ 3
IF:
MT318
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
IF:
MT314
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSINGboard
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 554 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ L1
L2
L3
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
X1
MAIN
TRANSF.
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
BATT.
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
OUT 04
I4
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
29
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
LEGEND:
1
G
3~
GEN.
2
3
4
5
6
PHASE
CURRENTS
measured:
IL1
measured:
IL2
calculated
by wiring:
6 I =
L3
- (IL1 + IL2)
PHASOR
DIAGRAM
6
1A
1A
1A
IL3
EXAMPLE no. 2
NOTEBOOK
DISPLAY:
|I2| = |NEG.PH.
SEQU.CURR.|
0A
0A
0,577A
0,577A
0,577A
0,577A
1A
1A
1A
1A
IL1
EXAMPLE no. 1
|I2| =
(IL1 + a.IL2 +
a.IL3) / 3
IL2
IL1
1A
0A
IL2 = 0
1A
IL3
IL3
EXAMPLE no. 3
0A
1A
IL1 = 0
1A
IL2
4
EXAMPLE no. 4
IL1
1A
1A
1A
IL2
IL2
EXAMPLE no. 5
1A
1A
IL3
IL1
2A
IL3
EXAMPLE
Fig. 19-15
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
19.5 FUNCTION
General Basics:
CT supervision functions are applied for the internal DRS monitoring features to check the CT
external plant circuits but also to verify the correct internal signal processing.
Monitoring is based on the fact that in high voltage systems under normal operating conditions
there are no negative phase sequence- or zero sequence components except for the duration
of system disturbances or faults
All function analogue signals are sampled 12 times each cycle. Via Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
corresponding vectors (value and phase angle) for the 1st harmonic are determined.
At each sample interval the CPU evaluates the zero sequence- or NPS system and compares
whether the initiating conditions are above the operating setting. If the initiating conditions are
exceeding the set values during 24 consecutive samples (= 2 cycles) then the time delay is started.
After the configured time delay expiry the fault alarm is given and in the DRS fault
status the condition CT/VT Fault entered.
CT Supervision.
Differences Between the Various Functions.
MT211 evaluates:
MT311 evaluates:
MT314 evaluates:
MT316:
MT318:
DID-001-1.02
Page 556 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
19.5.1 MT211
The function is computing the vector current sum (= 2 x zero sequence current).
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the current sum.
Example 1:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L3 = 0.
Display window shows 1 A (= current sum).
Example 2:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L3 = 1 A, 0 angle displacement with phase L1.
Display window shows 2 A (= current sum).
Example 3:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L3 = 1 A, 180 angle displacement with phase L1.
Display window shows 0 (= current sum).
Note: Refers to normal operating conditions.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
19.5.2 MT311
The function is computing the vector current sum (= 3 x zero sequence current).
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the current sum.
Example 1:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L2 = 0
Current phase L3 = 0
Display window shows 1 A (= current sum)
Example 2:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L2 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 0
Display window shows 1 A (= current sum)
Example 3:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L2 = 1 A (equal phase angle L1)
Current phase L3 = 1 A (equal phase angle L1)
Display window shows 3 A (= current sum)
Example 4:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L2 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 1 A (240 electrical lagging L1)
Display window shows 0 (= current sum)
Note: Refers to normal operating conditions
DID-001-1.02
Page 558 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
19.5.3 MT314
The function computes the NPS current system: I2 = (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3.
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the NPS system.
Example 1:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L2 = 0
Current phase L3 = 0
Display window shows 0.33 A (= NPS system)
Example 2:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L2 = 1 A (180 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 0.
Display window shows 0.577 A (= NPS system)
Example 3:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L2 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 0
Display window shows 0.33 A (= NPS system)
Example 4:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L2 = 1 A (equal phase angle L1)
Current phase L3 = 1 A (equal phase angle L1)
Display window shows 0 A (= NPS system)
Note: A purely zero sequence current system
Example 5:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L2 = 1 A (240 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Display window shows 1 A (= NPS system)
Note: A purely NPS current system
Example 6:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L2 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Current phase L3 = 1 A (240 electrical lagging L1).
Display window shows 0 (= NPS system).
Note: Normal operation being a purely positive sequence system
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
19.5.4 MT316
Inputs and internal computation as MT311 however provided with additional outputs to the software
LED matrix and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied just like a
normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT311 is optional, i.e. a red status LED in the first row
and can be enabled or disabled via the setting parameters.
19.5.5 MT318
Inputs and internal computation as MT314 however provided with additional outputs to the software
LED matrix and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied just like a
normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT314 is optional, i.e. a red status LED in the first row
and can be enabled or disabled via the setting parameters.
DID-001-1.02
Page 560 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
19.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections.
The parameters for the operating value and time delay have to be set to the designed values.
For the "VT Test 3 Phase, " function also the corresponding phase rotation has to be configured.
Function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
Single phase inject 1.1 times the current operating value into the system. By correct function
response after the set time delay following annunciations occur.
Fault alarm category 1
Fault indication, i.e. red "Fault" LED flashing
With protective functions MT316 and MT318 additionally also the configured LEDs
and outputs are activated.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read out the
entry " CT/VT Fault".
Switch off the injected test current and reset the fault alarm by operating the blue reset key
until the yellow and red LED row indication is altering alternatively
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 562 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MU . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
Synchronising check
1077
MU211
25
C2,M
Voltage balance 1
1069
MU611
60
C2,M
Voltage balance 2
1072
MU312
60
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
Synchronising check
1077
ANSI
MU211
25
Application
C2,M
Synchronising check function providing an interlock for paralleling live line and/or
dead bus systems.
MU211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over-/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 564 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
Voltage balance 1
1069
MU611
ANSI
60
Application
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with comparison features between two 3 phase VTs
indicating the faulty VT set.
MU611
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L1-0
Voltage system 1/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L2-0
Voltage system 1/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L3-0
Voltage system 2/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L1-0
Voltage system 2/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L2-0
Voltage system 2/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L3-0
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation L1
Trip L1
Initiation L2
Trip L2
Initiation L3
Trip L3
System 1 (Indication: VT system 1 faulty)
System 2 (Indication: VT system 1 faulty)
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 50 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
VT voltage: 10 ... 90 V in 1 V steps
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 566 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
Voltage balance 2
1072
MU312
ANSI
Application
60
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with blocking features during unsymmetrical
load conditions.
MU312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I:
Operating value U:
Operating time:
Phase rotation:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
SYSTEM 1
L3
X1
SYSTEM 2
L1
L2
L3
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
I3
U L1L2
U L1L2
SYSTEM 2
+
TEST (opt.) BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I8
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKB
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
I9
U1
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 09
X7
LEGEND:
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 04
I4
29
SYSTEM 1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 568 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
20.3.2 MU611
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSMODULAR
U L3/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
U L1/P.T.1
P.T.1
U L1/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
P.T.2
U L3/P.T.1
U L1/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U L1/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
+
TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) -
A1X5/
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
A2X33/
b02
+
d06 ^ z02
+
d06 ^ -
1 IN 01
1 IN 02
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
MU312
+ L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
G
3~
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
U L3L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 570 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
SYSTEM 1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
L1
SYSTEM 1
U L1L2
SYSTEM 2
L1
L2
U L1L2
L3
SYSTEM 2
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
NOTEBOOK
SYSTEM1
U L1L2
>=1
|U| <(VOLT.THRESHOLD)
2
SYSTEM2
U L1L2
TEST
LEDDISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
SYNCHRO-CHECK = OK.
1
0
>=1
BLOCKING
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t>
1
0
RELEASE
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
OUTPUT = RELEASE
(SYNCHRO CHECK = OK
CB ON = APPROVED)
TRIPMATRIX
RELEASE
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Page 572 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
OUTPUT
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
One or both voltages have to be below the set value VOLTAGE THRESHOLD.
Both voltages have to be above the set value VOLTAGE THRESHOLD and
the difference of the two voltages has to be smaller than the set value
DIFFERENTIAL VOLTAGE.
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
20.4.2 MU611
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSMODULAR
U L3/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
U L1/P.T.1
P.T.1
U L1/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
P.T.2
U L3/P.T.1
U L1/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U L3/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U L1/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
U1
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSMODULAR
PROCESSING
CB1
CB2
60 Alarm
60 Trip
DID-001-1.02
Page 574 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK
U L1/P.T.1
DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE A
DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE B
DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE C
VOLTAGE BALANCE
ALARM L1
U L2/P.T.1
U L3/P.T.1
U L1/P.T.2
SYSTEM1 MISSING
SYSTEM2 MISSING
VOLTAGE BALANCE
ALARM L2
SYSTEM1 MISSING
U L2/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
SYSTEM2 MISSING
VOLTAGE BALANCE
ALARM L3
SYSTEM1 MISSING
SYSTEM2 MISSING
PROCESSING
ALARM L1
>=1
&
&
ALARM L1
TRIP L1
t>
&
TRIP L1
LEDDISPLAY
ALARM L2
>=1
TEST
&
t>
>=1
&
TRIP L2
LEDMATRIX
ALARM L3
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM L2
TRIP L2
1
0
BL.
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM L3
TRIP L3
&
t>
&
TRIP L3
&
>=1
&
&
TRIPMATRIX
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
NO ALARM IF
BOTH SYSTEMS
MISSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MU611
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
LEDMATRIX
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 576 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
20.4.3 MU312
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
60 Alarm
60 Trip
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
I2 NPS-CURRENT
U2 NPS-VOLTAGE
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
I L1
I L2
I L3
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
U2
|U2|>
I2
|I2|<
U2 >
&
TEST
LEDDISPLAY
I2 <
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM
>=1
BLOCKING
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
t>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
&
1
0
&
TRIP
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MU312 VOLTAGE BALANCE2 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 20-11
DID-001-1.02
Page 578 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
U2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
I2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.CURR.
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
|I2|<
TRIPMATRIX
always
0"
LEDDISPLAY
|U2|>
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LED-indications of
PROCESSING-board
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
20.5 FUNCTION
20.5.1 MU211
Synchronising check function providing an interlock for paralleling live line and/or dead bus
power systems.
The function is computing the absolute voltage vector difference of the two VT voltages.
Principle:
A.
Dead Line And/Or Dead Bus Mode:
a)
Both input voltages have to be below the "Voltage Limit" setting value.
b)
One input voltage has to be below the "Voltage Limit" setting value.
B.
Live Line/Live Bus Mode:
Both input voltages have to be above the "Voltage Limit" setting value and the absolute value
of the differential voltage vector must be smaller than the Voltage Difference setting.
A. + B.
Note:
Therefore the "Voltage Limit" setting value for either operating mode is to be approached
in an opposite way.
DID-001-1.02
Page 580 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
20.5.2 MU611
Voltage Balance 1
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with comparison features between two 3 phase VTs
indicating the faulty VT set.
This function can either be applied for phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages.
Principle:
The function is evaluating the absolute voltage vector difference (amplitude difference and phase
angle are considered) for all 3 VT voltages and when the setting value of one phase is exceeded
a corresponding initiation signal output, and after the set time delay a trip output signal is given for
each individual phase.
Also a VT fault indication is provided for either of the two VT systems:
"System 1"
"System 2" ...
... Specification of the function outputs System 1 and System 2:
"System 1" means: The VT of Systems 1 is faulty, i.e. at least one of the three voltages is
below the "VT Voltage" setting.
"System 2" means: The VT of Systems 2 is faulty, i.e. at least one of the three voltages is
below the "VT Voltage" setting. Note: Also operating when "System 1" is faulty.
As outlined above, the failure of a VT set is additionally supervised by an integrated undervoltage
function which will operate when the VT Voltage configuration is falling below the setting value
("System 1" or "System 2").
Please note: The above alarm annunciations do not definitely mean a VT fault- or differential
voltage condition but only indicates that one of the input voltage is below the set VT Voltage
minimum.
Function Application:
Only applicable for DRS-MODULAR since 6 VT inputs are required.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
20.5.3 MU312
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with blocking features during unsymmetrical
load conditions.
This function is based on the evaluation of the negative phase sequence voltage
component (NPS voltage).
Principle:
The protective function is evaluating the V-inverse system (NPS) and from the results derives
the voltage symmetry. The PC window display for the "Internal Measured Values" shows the
computed V- and I- inverse values.
The I- inverse system serves for function blocking.
DID-001-1.02
Page 582 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
20.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
20.6.1 MU211
Disconnect Trip output and make test synchronisation. Check correctly function of trip output with
output LED and digital multimeter.
20.6.2 MU311 / MU611
During normal operation and preferably off-load one of the VT voltages is disconnected whereby
the protective function has to operate.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 584 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
21 MU... OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE DT
21.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MU . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MU . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
Application
1009
MU111
59/27
C2,M,L
1011
MU121
59/27
C2,M,L
1051
MU120
59/27
C2,M
1008
MU311
59/27
C2,M
1057
MU313
59/27
C2,M,L
1089
MU314
59/27
C2,M
1090
MU315
59/27
C2,M,L
1010
MU321
59/27
C2,M
1053
MU322
59/27
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1009
MU111
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable
over- or undervoltage evaluation.
MU111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 586 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1011
MU121
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M,L
1 phase, 2 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable
over- or undervoltage evaluation.
MU121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Test input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1051
MU120
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M
MU120
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input (DC voltage)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Setting range:
Voltage at 0 V:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 3 cycles typical atPROCESSINGsample
frequency
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 588 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1008
MU311
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable
over- or undervoltage evaluation with separate outputs.
MU311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation system 1
Trip system 1
Initiation system 2
Trip system 2
Initiation system 3
Trip system 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1057
MU313
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable
over- or undervoltage evaluation with common outputs.
MU313
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 590 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1089
MU314
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M
3 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable over- or undervoltage
evaluation and configurable reset ratio, with separate outputs.
MU314
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation system 1
Trip system 1
Initiation system 2
Trip system 2
Initiation system 3
Trip system 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.99
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1090
MU315
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable over- or undervoltage
evaluation and configurable reset ratio, with common outputs.
MU315
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.99
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 592 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1010
MU321
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M
3 phase, 2 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable over- or undervoltage
evaluation and separate outputs.
MU321
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1/ system 1
Trip stage 1/ system 1
Initiation stage 1/ system 2
Trip stage 1/ system 2
Initiation stage 1/ system 3
Trip stage 1/ system 3
Initiation stage 2/ system 1
Trip stage 2/ system 1
Initiation stage 2/ system 2
Trip stage 2/ system 2
Initiation stage 2/ system 3
Trip stage 2/ system 3
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 594 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1053
MU322
ANSI
Application
59/27
C2,M
3 phase, 2 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable over- or undervoltage
evaluation and common outputs.
MU322
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Type:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
+
+
+
+
-
I9
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 07
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 09
UAKB
U L3L1
OUT 05
I8
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 596 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
V L1L2
1
V L2L3
V L3L1
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
59 Alarm
59 Trip
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
NOTEBOOK
set value:
V L1L2
V L2L3
V L3L1
Type =
OVERDETECTION
Type =
UNDERDETECTION
V L1L2
V L2L3
V L3L1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM
STAGE 1
VL1-L2
VL2-L3
VL3-L1
>=1
ALARM
STAGE 2
VL1-L2
VL2-L3
>=1
VL3-L1
ALARM ST.2
ALARM ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.1
>=1
TEST ST.2
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
FUNCTION
&
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
1
PROCESSING
SHOWN:
3-PH. RELAY WITH
SUMMED UP OUTPUTS.
DID-001-1.02
Page 598 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MU111...MU322
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Type =
OVERDETECTION
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
Type =
UNDERDETECTION
(|FFT 1.H.| of UL1L2 ) > (set value
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
MU322
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
21.5 FUNCTION
21.5.1 MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU321
Over/undervoltage time delayed protective functions with a DT characteristic are applied
where a suitable time delay for a co-ordinated shut down of the respective plant equipment
is necessary in case of over- or undervoltage conditions above or below the pre-set voltage
limit values. Besides the normal voltage supervision this also includes special applications
such as earth fault protection or interturn faults by generators.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. From the measured
results the amplitude of the basic harmonic is considered for each system according to the
standard algorithm (Fourier Transformation).
For each sample interval the computed amplitude value is compared with the configured
settings (above setting by over evaluation and below setting by under evaluation).
When initiating conditions persist during 24 consecutive samples, i.e. 2 cycles, the
instantaneous output is set and the time delay started. After expiry of the set time delay
the trip output is activated. The delay is according to the applied DT characteristic independent
from the input signal value.
Initiation and at the same time any possible trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive
sampling intervals (3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip signal extension).
DID-001-1.02
Page 600 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
21.6 COMMISIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 602 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
22
MX... OVERFLUXING
22.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MX . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MX . . .
FNNR TYPE
ASNI
Application
1035
MX121
81
C2,M,L
1079
MX125
81
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1035
ANSI
MX121
81
Application
C2,M,L
Two stage overfluxing function with definite time (DT) V/f evaluation.
MF121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Note: For frequency evaluation the SYNC channel of the
PROCESSING is always taken. The voltage input only provides the
actual voltage signal fort he computation of the fluxing level (V/f ratio).
The SYNC channel and the voltage measuring input need not
necessarily be the same.
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1:
Operating time stage 1:
Operating value stage 2:
Operating time stage 2:
Nominal voltage:
Nominal frequency:
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: Depending on the frequency shift.
Condition: The SYNC channel must already be
active for about 1 s.
Accuracy: 0.01 Hz
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1079
ANSI
MX125
81
Application
C2,M,L
MX125
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Note: For frequency evaluation the SYNC channel of the
PROCESSING is always taken. The voltage input only provides the
actual voltage signal fort he computation of the fluxing level (V/f ratio).
The SYNC channel and the voltage measuring input need not
necessarily be the same.
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Test input stage 1
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
Time constant:
Saturation limit:
Saturation alarm:
Saturation trip:
Nominal voltage:
Nominal frequency:
DID-001-1.02
Page 606 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio:
Operating time: Depending on the frequency shift.
Condition: The SYNC channel must already be
active for about 1 s.
Accuracy: 0.01 Hz
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L3
X1
TRANSFORMER
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
I9
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 11
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 10
OUT 12
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
OUT 07
OUT 09
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) +
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) -
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
3~
OUT 03
I3
29
UL1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 608 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
22.3.2 MX125
+ L3
X1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 03
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
G
3~
+
TEST (opt.) BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
GEN.
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
UAKB
U L1L2
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I3
29
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L1
L2
L3
PROCESSING
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
MAIN
TRANSF.
UL1L2
GEN.
G
3~
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCK. ST.1
(optional)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
BLOCK. ST.2
ALARM
CONTACTS
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 610 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
FLUX
NOTEBOOK
U L1
= ACTUAL
FLUX
set value NOM. FREQU.
>=1
TEST ST.2
ALARM ST.1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1 >
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST.2
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
&
LEDMATRIX
ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TRIP ST.2
t2 >
FUNCTION
&
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIPMATRIX
1
PROCESSING
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MX121
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
1
0
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
OUTPUT
LEDMATRIX
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
= ACTUAL
FLUX
set value NOM. FREQU.
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
ALARM ST.2
TRIP ST.1
TRIP ST.2
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 612 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
22.4.2 MX125
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
L2
L3
PROCESSING
L1
U L1L2
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SATURATION
FLUX
NOTEBOOK
FLUX 3
U L1L2
FLUX 2
FLUX 1
V / Vn
f / fn
TRIP (set)
ALARM (set)
FLUX
SATURATION
LIMIT (set)
t
SATURATION
TEMP
CALCULATION OF ALARM/ TRIP
SATURATION TEMP.
TRIP
TRIP (set)
ALARM (set)
ALARM
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP
ALARM
ALARM
BLOCKING
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
&
ALARM
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP
>=1
FUNCTION
&
&
TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
1
TRIPMATRIX
Uphase-phase used for saturation detection must be the FFT-synchronising channel (see DRS/ page 0).
V, f actual values
actual saturation
temp. in [%] referred
to nom. saturation
temp. (Vn, fn, t = ).
DID-001-1.02
Page 614 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
V / Vn
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
f / fn
SATURATION TEMP.
FLUX 3
FLUX 2
FLUX 1
TRIP (set)
ALARM (set)
SATURATION
LIMIT (set)
LEDMATRIX
LEDDISPLAY
TRIPMATRIX
LED-indications of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
VGen
FLUX =
fGen.
100%
nom. flux =
VGen. nom
fGen. nom
SATURATION
TEMPRATURE
TRIP
ALARM
100%
SATURATION LIMIT
(1 - 1 / e) * (SATURATION LIMIT)
t
TIME CONSTANT
(set value)
LEGEND:
1 Recommended standard settings:
SET VALUE SATURATION LIMIT is choosen 100% nom. saturation temperature
(corresponds with VGen nom, fGen nom, t = ).
This value is reached at t = at nom. operation of generator or transformer.
2
ALARM level:
Example: Generator Volt. Nom. Range: VG nom 5% (assume).
SET VALUE ALARM: 106%. See note below!
TRIP level:
Example: Generator Volt. Nom. Rage: VG nom 5% (assume).
SET VALUE TRIP: 109% See note below!
, 3 Important note: Set values Alarm, Trip, Time constant to be correlated with
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION SETTINGS and with SPECIFICATION of GEN. MANUFACTERER.
DID-001-1.02
Page 616 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
22.5 FUNCTION
22.5.1 MX121
Electrical plants such as generators or transformers are designed and rated for a maximum
occurring flux density. When the value is exceeded, e.g. due to excitation regulator fault under
off-load conditions or power system voltage rise overheating of the machines with resulting
damages may occur. For instance, the big increase of the magnetising current with a large
higher harmonic component will not only cause overheating of the generator-transformer but
will also cause non-permissible induced voltage peaks in the generator rotor circuit.
The overfluxing protection is a single phase function and the voltage input signal is sampled
12 times each cycle. Via the Fourier Transformation the signal voltage level and frequency is
determined for each sample interval from which the instant V/f value is computed. This value
is compared with the nominal VN/fN setting and thus the saturation value S derived according
to following formula.
S=
V fN
VN f
For each sample interval the computed amplitude value is compared with the configured
settings for each stage and when initiating conditions persist during 24 consecutive samples,
i.e. 2 cycles, the instantaneous output for the relevant stage is set and the time delay started. After
expiry of the set time delay the corresponding the trip output is activated.
Initiation and at the same time any possible trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive
sampling intervals (3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip signal extension).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
22.5.2 MX125
Setting Values:
a)
"Saturation Limit".
Definition: At rated voltage and nominal frequency the flux level after the time constant period
is following:
Saturation = (1-1/e) x Saturation Limit.
The saturation limit is given in % of the nominal flux density whereby the nominal flux density
at rated voltage is theoretically approached asymptotic after an infinite time.
Caution: Also the Permissible Saturation Limit is independent from the function setting
approaching the permissible flux after an infinite time!!
Example: When a "Saturation Limit" setting is chosen to be 50% than the flux loading value
is also increasing correspondingly slower and will reach the 50% setting after an infinite approach.
b)
"Saturation Alarm": Is given as a %-age value of the nominal saturation limit (see (a)).
c)
"Saturation Trip": Is given as a %-age value of the nominal saturation limit (see (a)).
DID-001-1.02
Page 618 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
22.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
22.6.1 MX121
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value set
according to requirements.
The function checks are preferably performed with the primary protected plant being out of service.
The operating value- and time delay parameters are to be set to the designed values
(protection co-ordination requirements).
Also the relay outputs have to be set for the LED matrix and the TRIP matrix according to plant
requirements.
With a suitable relay test set or alternatively an external voltage source having a multimeter also
with frequency evaluation connected parallel to the respective voltage input inject rated voltage
with nominal frequency.
Compare the instrument readings with the DRS Internal Measured Values of the PROCESSING
Control Unit
whereby the internal saturation indication should show a value of 1.
Raise the test voltage up to the operating value of the function and record the result in the
Nominal Frequency Test column of the test sheets.
The function reset value is obtained by reducing the input voltage and the result should be recorded
as above.
At nominal voltage input the frequency is lowered to produce initiation of Stage 1 and by raising the
frequency again the function reset value is determined.
Both frequency values should be recorded in the commissioning test sheets.
During all tests the internal Saturation measured values has to be observed and by substituting
the results into the above formula verified by calculation.
Stage 2 should also be tested as outlined above.
The trip- and alarm signals and the LED indications should be confirmed according to the relay
configuration and the connection diagrams.
With 1.5 times the operating setting value verify the time delay for both stages by
using a suitable timer and record the measured results in the test sheets.
A test of the configured function blocking input should be done in conjunction with a continuously
initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal can be verified without any
external initiation.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating
when not previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests
the original parameter settings have to be set to the original values and
restored according to the plant requirements
22.6.2 MX125
With the aid of the "Internal Measured Values" window display the correct function
behaviour can simply be confirmed during normal system operation.
At rated voltage and nominal frequency the saturation level shows 100 %.
The Saturation Burden is described in the PROCESSING logic diagrams.
DID-001-1.02
Page 620 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
FNNR TYPE
1097
MY111
ANSI
Application
C2,M,L
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
Energising function
1097
MY111
ANSI
Application
C2,M,L
MY111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Measuring voltage (16 2/3 Hz system)
Rotor current (AC side)
Generator voltage L1-L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
CB close command
Outputs
Binary: Operation interlock
Preventive interlock
Closing without reference voltage
Setting Parameters
Minimum voltage: 50 ... 100 V in 1 V steps
Maximum voltage: 100 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Time delay: 0 ... 170 ms in 5 ms steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% Vn
DID-001-1.02
Page 622 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GEN.
G
2~
CB1 to be closed/
using MY111
Important note:
voltage channel
must be same as
used for DRS-internal
FFT-synchronisation.
+
(CB1) CLOSE ORDER TEST (opt.) +
BLOCKING (opt.) +
-
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULES:
-MIEGL
rotor isolation supervision
-eIEGL
rotor earth fault protection
-EURAX
signal transducer
-eIU124
shaft current supervision
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 06
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
FRONTSIDE
NOTEBOOK
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
CAN BUS
RS 232
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MODBUS
U R-T
I6
OUT 05
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RS422/485
DRS
COMPACT 2
I5
OPTIONAL MODULES
CB2
OUT 04
I4
eIU124
MAIN
TRANSF.
OUT 03
I3
EURAX
I2
NC
CANL
GND
NC
NC
GND
CANH
NC
NC
CB1
I1
eIEGL23
U R-T
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
MIEGL
R
L1
X9
X10
X11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
T
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
1
PROCESSING
CB1
MAIN
TRANSF.
CB2
U R-T
3
G
2~
GEN.
(CB1) CLOSE
1
CB1 to be closed/
using MY111
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
Important note:
voltage channel
must be same as
used for DRS-internal
FFT-synchronisation.
ORDER
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
CLOSE
RELEASE
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB
Close Release
Inhibit
Close w/o V-ref
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 624 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
U R-T
INHIBIT (U>Umax)
(=SYNCHR.
CHANNEL
FFT)
UR-T
SETTING 1
TIME DELAY
PLEASE
NOTE!
CB1
CLOSED
1
DIG. OUTPUT
CB1 CLOSE REL. (short pulse)
2
DIG. INPUT
CLOSE ORDER (long pulse)
close release
INHIBIT
2
(CB1)
CL.
ORD.
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
CLOSE RELEASE
LEDDISPLAY
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TEST
>=1
1
0
>=1
LEDMATRIX
FUNCTION
t > tSET
OUTPUT
CLOSE RELEASE
&
1
0
CLOSE RELEASE
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BL.
&
1
0
&
PROCESSING
TIME DELAY =
CB1 CLOSING TIME.
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MY111
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
U R-T
CLOSE ORDER
UR-T
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
BIN. I/0
PRESET
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
SETTING
TIME DELAY
CLOSE RELEASE
CLOSE w/o VOLT. REF.
CB1
CLOSED
DIG. OUTPUT
CB1 CLOSE REL. (short pulse)
DIG. INPUT
CLOSE ORDER (long pulse)
LEDMATRIX
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
LEDthe LED-indications
PROCESSING
DISPLAY
(row 2...14) of
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
Programmable software-matrix for the output-contacts (OUT1...OUT30)
TRIPMATRIX
>
<
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 23-4
DID-001-1.02
Page 626 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
MAIN TRANSFORMER
CB CLOSE CONTROL/ FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE
CB1
T1
IMAGNETISING + IINRUSH
I=0
2-PHASE SYSTEM
(RAILWAY/ 16 2/3 Hz)
UR-T
MAIN TRANSFORMER
UR-T
set value
DELAY
TIME
1
90
INPUT
CLOSE
ORDER
180
270
360
OUTPUT
CLOSE
RELEASE
1
1
Note: in practive the DELAY TIME will be much longer than shown on this diagram.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
IMAGNETISING + IINRUSH
I = 0 (always)
UR-T
MAIN TRANSFORMER
A.)
NOTE:
AVAILABLE FOR
2-PHASE SYSTEMS
(16 2/3 Hz) ONLY!)
UR-T
CB1 closed at
t
I = IINRUSH
INRUSH CURRENT OF T1
NORMAL
MAGNETISING CURR. OF T1
RESULT:
INRUSH CURR. = max
t
UR-T
B.)
CB1 closed at
I = IINRUSH
RESULT:
NORMAL
MAGNETISING CURRENT OF T1
DID-001-1.02
Page 628 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
23.5 FUNCTION
23.5.1 MY111
Application of this function: For railway traction systems / 16 2/3 Hz/ 2 phase.
Note: Railway systems are generally not earthed at the LV side and are 2 phase floating
systems whereas at the HV side one phase is connected to ground.
The function is monitoring the phase to phase voltages of this system.
Please note that this particular protective function may not be applied for 50 Hz singe- or
three phase systems.
Function operating sequence:
The function is energising the single phase transformer at the instant of 90 phase to phase voltage.
Note: At 16 2/3 Hz the sample interval the measured values is about 5 ms (Fourier Analysis)
whereby the function is normally selecting the sample close to the voltage maximum value.
Also the function is switching-on the transformer at a V = 0 value after exactly one sample
after request.
Operating logic:
V>Vmax: Interlock
Vmin<V<Vmax: Switch-on at voltage maximum of phase to phase voltage.
V<Vmin: Interlock disable without reference voltage whereby after 1 sample the
CB closing command is initiated.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
23.6 COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
23.6.1 MY111
Several repeated energising test of the transformer have to be carried out to verify the correct
performance of the DRS Energising Function to verify the correct performance with the aid
of the DRS Recorded Curves feature, i.e. Internal Recorded Curves.
But most important: Please observe the transformer design rating.
Note: The MY111 parameter "Function Initiates Fault Record" has to be configured.
DID-001-1.02
Page 630 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
24.1 OVERVIEW
List of the Available MZ . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations:
C2
M
L
FNNR
TYPE
ANSI
... DRS-COMPACT2A
... DRS-MODULAR
... DRS-LIGHT
... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
... Function type (short name of the protective function)
... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MZ . . .
FNNR TYPE
ANSI
1026
MZ221
21
Application
C2,M
1059
MZ222
21
C2,M,L
1025
MZ321
21
C2,M
1058
MZ322
21
C2,M,L
Undervoltage/overcurrent, 3-phase
1074
MZ311
51/27
C2,M
1095
MZ312
51/27
C2,M
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1026
MZ221
ANSI
Application
21
C2,M
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for two-phase systems,
with separate outputs.
MZ221
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input system 1 phase L1
Current input system 2 phase L2
Voltage input system 1
Voltage input system 2
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (Z<t)
Blocking input stage 2 (I>t)
Test input stage 1 (Z<t)
Test input stage 2 (I>t)
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 2, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Initiation L2, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L2, stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1 (impedance):
Operating value stage 2 (current interlock +
overcurrent):
Time delay stage 1:
Time delay stage 2:
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1059
MZ222
ANSI
Application
21
C2,M,L
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for two-phase systems
with common outputs.
MZ222
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input system 1 phase L1
Current input system 2 phase L3
Voltage input system 1
Voltage input system 2
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Blocking input stage 2
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2 (I>t)
Trip stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1 (impedance):
Operating value stage 2 (current interlock +
overcurrent):
Time delay stage 1:
Time delay stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 634 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1025
MZ321
ANSI
21
Application
C2,M
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for three-phase systems,
with separate outputs.
MZ321
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input system 1 phase L1
Current input system 2 phase L2
Current input system 3 phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (Z<t)
Blocking input stage 2 (I>t)
Test input stage 1 (Z<t)
Test input stage 2 (I>t)
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 2, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 3, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 3, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Initiation L2, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L2, stage 2 (I>t)
Initiation L3, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L3, stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1 (impedance):
Operating value stage 2 (current interlock +
overcurrent):
Time delay stage 1:
Time delay stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 636 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1058
MZ322
ANSI
21
Application
C2,M,L
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for three-phase systems,
with common outputs.
MZ322
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input system 1 phase L1
Current input system 2 phase L2
Current input system 3 phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (Z<t)
Blocking input stage 2 (I>t)
Test input stage 1 (Z<t)
Test input stage 2 (I>t)
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2 (I>t)
Trip stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1 (impedance):
Operating value stage 2 (Current interlock +
overcurrent):
Time delay stage 1:
Time delay stage 2:
DID-001-1.02
Page 638 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
6% of impedance setting value
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1074
MZ311
ANSI
Application
51/27
C2,M
MZ311
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Test input voltage function
Blocking input voltage function
Test input current function
Blocking input current function
Outputs
Binary: Undervoltage/overcurrent initiation
Undervoltage/overcurrent trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value U:
Operating value I:
Operating time:
Latched interlock:
End latched interlock:
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
DID-001-1.02
Page 640 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
FNNR TYPE
1095
MZ312
ANSI
Application
51/27
C2,M
Definite time delayed overcurrent protection with two timing stages. The current interlock
is enabled in case of undervoltage or inverse time overvoltage conditions.
MZ312
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Current input phase L3
Voltage input system 1-2
Voltage input system 2-3
Voltage input system 3-1
Binary: Test input voltage function
Blocking input voltage function
Test input current function
Blocking input current function
Outputs
Binary: Undervoltage/overcurrent initiation
Undervoltage/overcurrent trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I>:
Operating value V<:
Operating value Vinv:
Operating time 1:
Operating time 2:
Phase rotation:
End latched interlock:
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% of current value
DID-001-1.02
Page 642 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
I L1
1A
5A
I L1
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
U R-T
U T-0
U T-R
I5
I6
LEGEND:
1 Current direction irrelevantely
because MIN. IMP.-function is
non-directional.
OUT 06
OUT 07
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 05
OUT 08
I7
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) +
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.) -
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
1A
OUT 04
I4
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U R-T
G
2~
1A
5A
28
OUT 03
I3
29
alternatively:
GEN.
25
26
27
I2
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
U R-0
I1
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
1
2
3
UAKB
T
L3
OPTIONAL MODULE
R
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
G
3~
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
UAKB
+
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) +
BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) +
BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.) TEST ST.1 (opt.)
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L2L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L3L1
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
GEN.
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 644 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
24.3.3 MZ311
+ L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
GEN.
G
3~
TEST V (opt.)
BLOCKING V (opt.)
TEST I (opt.)
BLOCKING I (opt.)
+
+
+
+
-
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
I9
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
UAKB
U L3L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
I7
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L2L3
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X2
4
5
6
7
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 24-3
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
24.3.4 MZ312
+ L3
X1
I L1
1
2
3
1A
5A
I L2
4
5
6
1A
5A
I L3
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
G
3~
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) TEST (opt.)
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
I9
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
OUT 16
U4
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
OUT 07
OUT 09
UAKB
GEN.
OUT 06
OUT 08
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 05
I8
OPTIONAL MODULE
U L3L1
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U L2L3
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
U L1L2
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 646 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L1
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
U R-0
1
U R-T
U T-0
alternatively:
G
2~
U R-T
2
U T-R
GEN.
IR
IT
TEST ST1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST1
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST2
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
ALARM CONTACTS
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
1
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
CB1
CB2
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
Fig. 24-5
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 1 [Ohm]
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 2 [Ohm]
NOTEBOOK
U L1-0 5
resp. UL1-L3
lZ1l =
U L3-0 6
resp. UL3-L1
lUL1-0l
|Z1|> set
lIL1l
I
I
L1
lZ3l =
L3
lUL3-0l
|Z3|> set
lIL3l
6 alternatively: |Z1| =
lUL1-L3l
lIL1l
|IL1|> set
>=1
&
t > set
|IL2|> set
>=1
&
t > set
TEST ST. 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
t > set
t > set
ALARM ST.1
BLOCK. ST. 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST. 1
TRIP ST.1
1
0
TEST ST. 2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
&
TRIP ST. 1
LEDDISPLAY
1
0
ALARM ST.2
BLOCK. ST. 2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST. 2
LEDMATRIX
1
0
TRIP ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
>=1
&
&
TRIP ST. 2
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Page 648 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
|IL1|> SET
lZ1l =
lUL1-0l
lIL1l
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
..
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
lZACTUALl
ZSET
Analog
INPUT
signals
I ACTUAL
ISET
ALARM
STAGE 1
(Z< & I>)
TRIP
STAGE 1
(Z< & I>)
Digital
OUTPUT
signals
ALARM
STAGE 2
(I>)
t
TRIP
STAGE 2
(I>t)
tDELAY(CUR)
t
DID-001-1.02
Page 650 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
GEN.
G
3~
I L1
I L2
I L3
TEST ST1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST2
TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
CB1
CB2
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
Note:
phase separated OUTPUTS at MZ321 only
MZ322 shared Outputs for phases L1, L2, L3.
ALARM CONTACTS
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
Impedance
1
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Trip
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 1 [Ohm]
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 2 [Ohm]
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 3 [Ohm]
NOTEBOOK
UL1L2
UL2L3
lZ1l =
lUL1L2l
lIL1-IL2l
|Z1|> set
lZ2l =
lUL2L3l
lIL2-IL3l
|Z2|> set
UL3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
LEGEND:
1 setting OPERATE VALUE
2 setting CURRENT INTERLOCK
lZ3l =
lUL3L1l
lIL3-IL1l
|Z3|> set
>=1
&
t > set
>=1
&
t > set
>=1
&
t > set
|IL1|> set
|IL2|> set
2
TEST ST. 1
|IL3|> set
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t > set
t > set
t > set
BLOCK ST. 1
4
4
4
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST. 1
TEST ST. 2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP ST. 1
1
0
ALARM ST. 1
>=1
&
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST. 1
BLOCK ST. 2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST. 2
>=1
&
&
ALARM ST. 2
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TRIP ST. 2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
>=1
&
&
TRIP ST. 2
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Page 652 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 1 [O]
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 2 [O]
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 3 [O]
NOTEBOOK
UL1L2
UL2L3
lZ1l =
lUL1L2l
lIL1-IL2l
|Z1|> set
lZ2l =
lUL2L3l
lIL2-IL3l
|Z2|> set
UL3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
LEGEND:
1 setting OPERATE VALUE
2 setting CURRENT INTERLOCK
lZ3l =
lUL3L1l
lIL3-IL1l
|Z3|> set
>=1
&
t > set
>=1
&
t > set
>=1
&
t > set
|IL1|> set
|IL2|> set
2
TEST ST. 1
|IL3|> set
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t > set
t > set
t > set
BLOCK ST. 1
4
4
4
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST. 1
TEST ST. 2
>=1
&
&
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP ST. 1
1
0
ALARM ST. 1
>=1
&
&
LEDDISPLAY
TRIP ST. 1
BLOCK ST. 2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
ALARM ST. 2
>=1
1
0
&
&
ALARM ST. 2
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
TRIP ST. 2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
>=1
&
&
TRIP ST. 2
PROCESSING
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
..
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
|IL1|> set
lZ1l =
lUL1L2l
lIL1-IL2l
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
1
0
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Page 654 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
lZACTUALl
ZSET
derived
from
Analog
INPUT
signals
IACTUAL
ISET
I> current
memory
interlock
funktion
ALARM
STAGE 1
(Z< & I>)
TRIP
STAGE 1
(Z< & I>)
tDELAY(IMP)
I> current
memory
interlock
funktion
t
Digital
OUTPUT
signals
ALARM
STAGE 2
(I>)
t
TRIP
STAGE 2
(I>)
tDELAY(CUR)
t
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
24.4.3 MZ311
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST V
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING V
(OPTIONAL)
TEST I
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCKING I
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
DRS
Trip
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2A
COMPACT
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 24-14
DID-001-1.02
Page 656 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
NOTEBOOK
V L1L2
V L2L3
V L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
V<
>=1
V<
V<
&
TEST V
V<
BLOCKING V
I>
&
>=1
I>
&
I>
ALARM
I>
SET VALUE
CURRENT MEMORY:
TEST V
TEST I
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCKING I
YES
&
NO
1
0
BLOCKING V
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
BLOCK
SIGNAL
END OF
TRIP PULSE
END OF
TRIP PULSE
RESET
CURRENT
MEMORY
TEST I
BIN. I/0
PRESET
t>
LEDDISPLAY
BLOCKING I
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
t
length of trip pulse
&
TRIP
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
END OF TRIP
PULSE
1
0
ALARM
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
&
ALARM
TRIPMATRIX
PROCESSING
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING
Fig. 24-15
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
LEGEND
PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ311
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
1
0
FUNCTION
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
0"
OUTPUT
1
0
I>
V<
SET VALUE
CURRENT MEMORY:
YES
NO
After the DELAY TIME (see settings) has expired a TRIP PULSE with an
(internal) specified (fixed) length is issued.
END OF
TRIP PULSE
LEDMATRIX
TRIPMATRIX
The falling edge of the TRIP PULSE (end of TRIP PULSE) is used to break up the
CURRENT MEMORY.
END OF TRIP PULSE
Interrupts the CURRENT MEMORY feedback circuit.
Programmable
software-matrix for
the LED-indications
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
LEDDISPLAY
LED-indications
of
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
>
<
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING /
LEGEND
Fig. 24-16
DID-001-1.02
Page 658 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
I set
t
V actual
V set
t
(I>) & (V<)
[CURR. MEMORY=YES]
2
t
CURR. MEMORY
(=YES) takes over
ALARM
t
DELAY TIME
(set value)
TRIP
t
fixed length
(by firmware)
BLOCK I (opt.)
LEGEND:
1
Termination of CURRENT MEMORY feedback circuit by END OF TRIP PULSE acc. to set value:
END OF CURRENT MEMORY = End of Trip Pulse
Note: Length of trip pulse is fixed (DRS firmware).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Iactual
I>
Iset
In
t
Vactual
Un
Vset
V<
t
(I>) & (V<)
[CURR. MEMORY=NO]
(I>) & (V<)
ALARM
TRIP
DELAY TIME
(set value)
fixed length
(by firmware)
DID-001-1.02
Page 660 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
24.4.4 MZ312
L1
L2
L3
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT
CONTACTS
CB1
CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
I > Alarm
U < Alarm
NPS > Alarm
I > & (U < .or.
NPS >) Trip1
I > & (U < .or.
NPS >) Trip2
LEGEND
DRS
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
VERSION 2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK
U2 NPS-VOLTAGE
>=1
|U| <
U L1L2
U2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
OF PHASEPHASE
VOLTAGES
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
|I|>
>=1
U < alarm
&
&
U < alarm
I > alarm
|I| >
&
TEST
I > alarm
LEDDISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
>=1
&
TRIP 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TIME
DELAY1
1
0
(|U| <)
.OR.
(|U2| >)
&
|U|<
BLOCKING
NPS >
|U| <
.OR.
|U2| >
>=1
&
TRIP 1
LEDMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
&
TRIP 2
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
TIME
DELAY2
&
TRIP 2
1
0
VE2
VE2
TRIPMATRIX
DID-001-1.02
Page 662 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
PROCESSING
LEGEND
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ312
Online simulation
via notebook
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
U2
NEG.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT.
OF PHASEPHASE
VOLTAGES
Online-simulation of
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
via notebook:
regular
function
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
always
1"
BIN. I/0
PRESET
always
0"
TRIPMATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
Online-indication of DRS-internal
calculated values on notebook-screen
LEDDISPLAY
..
LEDMATRIX
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LED-indications of
PROCESSING-board
(row 2...14)
TRIP 2
>
<
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Iactual
I>
Iset
In
t
Vactual
Un
Vset
V<
t
|U2| (=NPS)
NPS-set
t
(I >) & ((U <) .or. (NPS >))
t
RESETTED BY EXT.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
DERIVED FROM CBOFF AUX. CONTACT
U < alarm
t
NPS > alarm
t
I > alarm
t
TRIP 1
TRIP 1
DELAY TIME 1
t
TRIP 2
TRIP 2
DELAY TIME 2
DID-001-1.02
Page 664 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
24.5 FUNCTION
24.5.1 MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322
Minimum impedance functions are applied as back-up protection instead of a distance protection
in the generator bus circuit or as a back-up for other plants where fault direction does not matter and
protection co-ordination with overcurrent functions will not provide a sufficient coverage.
The three phase minimum impedance protection is designed for isolated- or high impedance- or
Peterson Coil earthed power systems whereby the two phase model may also be applied in solid
grounded systems.
In order to cope for all fault conditions, with the exception of double earth faults, the three phase
model function is using, e.g. for measuring system 1 the phase currents IL1 and IL2 with vectorwise substraction and the impedance value of system 1 with the phase to phase voltages VL1-L2
according to the following formula below.
r
UL1L2
Z1 = r
r
I L1 I L 2
The same applies for the other two measuring systems by corresponding insertion of the relevant
measured values.
It can be validated that with this method any three phase- and two phase faults with- or without
ground connection are determined correctly.
The two phase function model is calculating for, e.g. system 1 according to following formula.
r
UL1
Z1 = r
I L1
For the impedance measurement an overcurrent interlock with latching features is applied
which means that if even the initiating current is falling below the set value the function will
be active as long as the impedance evaluation is not above the trigger value.
The overcurrent function interlock is also operating as a second stage time delayed overcurrent
protection.
The computation of the CT/VT input signals, i.e. phase currents and phase to phase voltages are
are carried out by the measuring algorithm 12 times each cycle.
Currents of the three phase function model are sampled for each system and substracted as
per above formula.
Afterwards with each sample interval the impedance of the 3 fault loops is calculated and
phase-wise verified whether the initiating condition is above the set value.
If the initiating conditions are above the current interlock and below the underimpedance
configuration during 24 consecutive sample intervals initiation of stage 2 is given first and the
corresponding time delay started whereby stage 1 is independent from the interlock setting staying
initiated as long as the impedance criteria are fulfilled. After expiry of the time delay
stage 1 a trip signal Trip Stage 1 is being produced.
Also after stage 2 delay a "Trip Stage 2" is given.
Via the Test and Blocking inputs the various stages of the minimum impedance function
can be tested and/or blocked during the commissioning procedures.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Initiation and at the same time any possible trip output will reset when during 36 consecutive
sampling intervals (3 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip signal extension).
24.5.2 MZ311
Undervoltage/Overcurrent, 3 Phase.
Function:
At least one of the three phase to phase voltages must be smaller and at least one of the three
current inputs must be larger than the configured setting values whereby voltage and current
inputs need not be associated.
Algorithm:
a)
V< (=Undervoltage) .AND. I> (=Overcurrent)
Have to occur simultaneously to initiate the function. It is sufficient when one of the three
phase to phase voltages is below the setting and any of the three phase currents is exceeding
the configured value.
Currents and voltages need not belong to a certain phase relation which also is not necessary.
b)
When setting parameter "Current Interlock" is reached then during the time delay sequence the
current value can fall below setting but a TRIP signal will still be initiated after the delay (Setting
Parameters "Operating time").
During the whole operating sequence the undervoltage initiation has to remain otherwise with
even the overcurrent stage being still activated the function would reset immediately.
c)
When the current interlock "Latched" parameter is not enabled then during the whole time delay
the conditions V< (undervoltage) .AND. I> (overcurrent) have to be present to produce a trip.
d)
After expiry of the time delay the trip output is initiated. After CB trip V< and I< are applicable.
Since I< (undercurrent) is no longer required for the function memory mode (see setting parameter
"Latched") the trip conditions after a generator shut-down would not reset. Therefore
it is necessary to reset the latched trip sequence after a trip by suitable means.
In the DRS User program a "End Latched Interlock" can be configured ensuring a trip output
reset under stand-still conditions:
"End Latched Interlock" = "External Blocking Signal": Blocking input "Voltage Function" must
be set via external contact inputs.
"End Latched Interlock" = "Trip Reset":
In this case the trip output duration is fixed
to the function internal memory feature of
300 ms.
Simultaneously with trip reset the
undercurrent memory is disabled.
DID-001-1.02
Page 666 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
e)
Blocking inputs:
Voltage blocking:
Current blocking input:
DRS
Is always active.
Is only active when the current interlock function
setting has not passed the latched current
configuration. This blocking feature does not
reset the undercurrent
interlock and therefore is not suitable for an
End Latched Interlock external input (refer to
item d).
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
24.5.3 MZ312
Definite time overcurrent protection with 2 time delay stages. The current interlock is enabled by
either undervoltage- or NPS overvoltage conditions.
Function:
At least one phase current has to be above the setting and simultaneously at least one of the
phase to phase voltages must be below the configured settings or the NPS voltage being above
setting during the whole time delay sequence.
Algorithm:
a)
I> (=Overcurrent)
.AND.
(U< (=Undervoltage)
Value
.OR.
... one of the three phase currents is above "Operating value I>" setting.
... one of the three phase to phase voltages is below the
"Operating Value V<".
- Vinv voltage function ... the NPS voltage value is larger than the "Operating value Vinv" setting.
- Trip 1
... is carried out after the "Operating Time 1" delay.
- Trip 2
... is carried out after the "Operating Time 2" delay
Note: Both trip signals are apart from the two time delays performing
the same shut-down sequence.
DID-001-1.02
Page 668 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
24.6 COMMISSIONING
24.6.1 MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value set
according to requirements.
The function checks are preferably performed with the primary protected plant being out of service.
The operating value- and time delay parameters are to be set to the designed values
(protection co-ordination requirements).
Also the relay outputs have to be set for the LED matrix and the TRIP matrix according to plant
requirements.
The function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
With a relay test set, for example inject a test current into phase L1 and L2 and apply a test voltage
with nominal rating to system 1 VL1-L2.
Increase the current input into the interlock direction (= Stage 2) of the impedance stage
and observe the operating response in the DRS optional Actual Measured Values
function display window.
Note the current interlock operating value (= Stage 2) in the commissioning sheets.
By injection of 1.2 times the configured current interlock value reduce the voltage until
operation of the impedance function.
Verify the result according to the above formula and also observe the optional
Actual Measured Values impedance window display.
Record the impedance stage operating value (= Stage 1) into the commissioning sheets.
Raise the test voltage input until the impedance stage (= Stage 1) resets and record the
value into the commissioning sheets.
Reduce the test current until the current interlock reset value and record the result in the
commissioning sheets.
Please note that all external measured inputs, i.e. CT/VT quantities can be observed in the
DRS User program displays.
Proceed with the same measurements for the other phases and record the values into the
commissioning sheets.
Observe the trip and alarm signals, respectively the LED indications according to the parameter
settings and the circuit diagrams.
Check the operating time at 1.5 times the setting for each phase and stage with a suitable
timer and enter the results into the test sheets.
Check the configured function blocks for each stage by applying the blocking signal when the
protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
DID-001-1.02
Page 670 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
Check the configured function test feature for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external current input.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant
parameter settings.
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 672 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
THEORY:
PHASORS TAKEN
FROM DRAWING:
UL3L1
PHASE L1
POTENTIAL
EARTH
POTENTIAL L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
UL1
UL2
UL3
DIR. 1 DIR. 2
IL1
GEN.
IL2
MOVE PHASE
VOLT. PHASORS:
UL3L1
UL3
IL3
L3
UL1
UL2
UL2L3
ROTATE PHASORS
DIAGRAM 180C:
This point is NOT
EARTH-POT.
UL1L2
UL2
UL3
UL3L1
UL3
UL1
UL1L2
UL2
L2
UL2L3
UL1
G
3~
DIRECTION 1:
UL1L2
IL1
UL1
IL1
DIRECTION 2:
UL1L2
G
3~
GEN.
UL1L2
UL1
IL1
UL1L2
GEN.
G
3~
IL1
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L3
X1
IL1
IL1
-30
UL1L2
IL1
U L1L2
UL3L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
UL1
UL2
UL3
+
+
BLOCKING (opt.) -
G
3~
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
future use (hardware extension)
IEC870 5-103 control system interface
chain line data interface
control system interface
I1
I2
OUT 04
I4
I5
I6
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
UAKBFAULT
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 03
I3
29
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
1A
5A
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TEST (opt.)
GEN.
4
5
6
OPTIONAL MODULE
MAIN
TRANSF.
1A
5A
UAKB
I L1
1
2
3
BATT.
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
MODBUS
L2
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
L1
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
IN09
X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DID-001-1.02
Page 674 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
30
INPUT PROCESSING:
channel U1=UL1L2
channel I1=IL1
channel I1=IL1
30
channel U1=UL1L2
-30
DRS-COMPACT1
(same as COMPACT2)
channel I1=IL1
30
channel U1=UL1L2
-30
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
L2
L3
I L1
F1X1
1
2
I1
A1X5
1
2
U1
UL1L2
IL1
-30
DRSDRSMODULAR
IL1
U L1L2
UL3L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
GEN.
G
3~
INPUT PROCESSING:
30
channel I1=IL1
channel U1=UL1L2
channel I1=IL1
30
channel U1=UL1L2
-30
DID-001-1.02
Page 676 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
L2
L3
I L1
X1
1
3
I1
X8
1
2
V 1-2
UL1L2
IL1
-30
DRSDRSLIGHT
IL1
U L1L2
UL3L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
GEN.
G
3~
INPUT PROCESSING:
30
channel I1=IL1
channel U1=UL1L2
channel I1=IL1
30
channel U1=UL1L2
-30
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Page 678 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
26
RS422/ 485
DRSDRS-C2
DRSDRS-C2
X2
4
5
6
7
OUT 31
OUT 32
Tx+
TxGND
MODBUS
560R
1W
120R
1W
OUT 32
8
9
10
560R
1W
120R
1W
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
RS422/485
+VCm= 5V=
Rx+
Rx4 GND
Tx+
Tx-
X2
4
5
6
7
OUT 31
MODBUS
11
12
13
14
15
16
+VCm= 5V=
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
(not used)
SHIELD 2.
MAY BE USED AS
GND-LINE
6
NOTEBOOK
(=BUS-MASTER)
DRSDRS-LIGHT
560R
1W
CONVERTER
RS485
RS232
120R
1W
560R
1W
+5V
47k
RS422/485
X3
+VCx= 5V=
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
9
10
11
12
13
14
120R
1W
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
100k
47k
PLUG:
SUB D9-F
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
GND
or
see
page 2
TERMINATING RESISTORS (120 OHM) & PULL-UP- & PULL-DOWN-RESISTOR (560 OHM):
MAY BE CANCELLED IF TOTAL LENGTH OF BUS < 30 m.
NOTE: CANCEL ALL OR NOTHING! IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINATING RESISTORS WITHOUT
PULL-UP/DOWN-RESISTORS! PULL-UP/DOWN-RESISTORS AT Rx-SIDE ONLY!
FOR SHORT CONNECTIONS (IF TOTAL < 30 m) NO SHIELD NECESSARY, JUST GND-LINE. USE STD. CUBICLE WIRING.
CABLES (IF TOTAL > 30 m): STANDARD TWISTED PAIR CABLE (2 x 0,6 mm) WITH SHIELD (USED AS GND-WIRE).
R = 100 OHM / 1 kM, MAX. C = 750 pF (MAX. 38400 Bd), CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE = 120 OHM
GND-CONNECTION: 100 R NOT NECESSARY BECAUSE GND IS POTENTIAL-FREE AT DRS-COMPACT AND DRS-LIGHT.
NOTEBOOK
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
CONVERTER
1
ST
SUB
D25-F
UN1052B
SUB
D25-F
ST
FIBREOPTIC
CONNECTOR
LEGEND:
1 2 3 4
UN6372S
SUB
D9-M
SUB
D25-F
GND
UN3
HCS-FIBRE
OPTIC CABLE
TYPE: UN3902
850nm
LENGTH: 50...500m
UN3052B
UN6052B
500m
1000m
UN3
50m
UN3372S
47k
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
SUB
D9-M
100k
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
UN3
SUB D9-F
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
PLASTIC-FIBRE
OPTIC CABLE
TYPE: UN1902
660nm
LENGTH: 0...50m
PLUG:
47k
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
UN3
+5V
UN1372S
RS232
SUB
D9-M
RS485
ST
3
GLASS-FIBRE ST
OPTIC CABLE
TYPE: GLASS
850nm
LENGTH: 500...1000m FIBREOPTIC
CONNECTOR
see page 4!
PRINCIPAL
DIAGRAM
DRS-COM4:
SLAVES COM-S...
COM-P
X11 X12 X13 X14
COM-S1
COM-S2
COM-S n
Backplate
Backplate
Backplate
COM-A1
COM-A2
COM-A n
DC-DC
MASTER
COM-M
Backplate
COM-M
X4 X3 X2 X1
ANALOG OUTPUTS
(OPT.)
MODEM
DCF77
DRS-COM2
Fig. 26-2
DID-001-1.02
Page 680 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
UN3
UN1052B
SUB
D25-F
UN3
UN3
CONVERTER
RS485
RS232
SUB
D9-M
UN1372S
SUB
D9-M
UN3372S
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
100k
47k
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
GND
UN3
ST
ST
ST
ST
UN3052B
SUB
D25-F
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
PLUG:
SUB D9-F
UN6052B
SUB
D25-F
47k
SUB
D9-M
UN6372S
+5V
connectors
plugged
together
47k
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
GND
UN1052B
SUB
D25-F
UN3
UN3
100k
ST
ST
ST
ST
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
100k
47k
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
GND
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
ST
ST
ST
UN1052B
SUB
D25-F
UN3052B
SUB
D25-F
UN3
ST
UN6052B
SUB
D25-F
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
PLUG:
SUB D9-F
UN1052B
SUB
D25-F
47k
ST
UN3
+5V
ST
COM4
UN3052B
SUB
D25-F
CONVERTER
RS485
RS232
ST
COM3
UN6052B
SUB
D25-F
ST
UN3
GND
SUB
D9-M
UN1372S
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
GND
UN3
47k
X1/2
X1/3
X1/8
X1/6
X1/1
X1/5
SUB
D9-M
UN3372S
100k
SUB
D9-M
UN6372S
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
SUB
D9-M
UN1372S
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
PLUG:
SUB D9-F
SUB
D9-M
UN3372S
47k
SUB
D9-M
UN6372S
+5V
COM1
COM2
CONTROL
ROOM-PC
UN3052B
SUB
D25-F
+5V
Tx+
TxGND
Rx+
Rx-
UN6052B
SUB
D25-F
SUB D9-F
W5
W1
W2
W6
W4
W3
UN3
PLUG:
SUB
D9-M
UN6372S
47k
UN3
+5V
SUB
D9-M
UN1372S
CONVERTER
RS485
RS232
SUB
D9-M
UN3372S
CONTROL ROOM-PC
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
UN1902
2* 1000 PMMA-Fibre
Fibre
2
UN3902
2* 200/230 HCS-Fibre
Outer diameter: 6mm
COM-M
SLAVES (COM-S...)
NOTEBOOK
(opt.)
opt.)
COM-M
SLAVES (COM-S...)
MASTER: COM1
X1 DRS COM
DIAGNOSTIC
MASTER: COM2
X2 PC
SLAVE: COM1-X21
SLAVE: COM2-X22
SLAVE: COM2-X11
MASTER: COM4
X4 DCF77
SLAVE: COM1-X12
DRS-COM2 / LEGEND
Fig. 26-4
DID-001-1.02
Page 682 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I1
I2
I5
I6
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
OUT 08
I7
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
I 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
U1
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
U5
OUT 17
OUT 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
IN 01
123
IN 02
OUT 19
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
FRONTSIDE
MODBUS
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
eIU124
eIEGL23
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
2
COMPACT
EURAX
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
OUT 03
OUT 04
MIEGL
OPTIONAL MODULES:
-MIEGL
rotor isolation supervision
-eIEGL
rotor earth fault protection
-EURAX
signal transducer
-eIU124
shaft current supervision
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I4
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LEGEND:
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...48VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
I3
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BATT.
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS-COMPACT2
Fig. 27-1
DID-001-1.02
Page 684 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
+ X1
1
2
3
1A
5A
4
5
6
1A
5A
7
8
9
1A
5A
10
11
12
1A
5A
13
14
15
1A
5A
16
17
18
1A
5A
19
20
21
1A
5A
22
23
24
1A
5A
25
26
27
1A
5A
28
1A
I1
I2
I3
I5
I6
OUT 03
OUT 05
OUT 06
OUT 07
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I8
OUT 09
I9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
U2
OUT 14
U3
OUT 15
U4
OUT 16
U5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
X6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 17
OUT 18
IN 01
OUT 19
IN 02
OUT 20
IN 03
OUT 21
IN 04
OUT 22
IN 05
OUT 23
IN 06
OUT 24
IN 07
IN 08
X2
4
5
6
7
FRONTSIDE
RS 232
TRANSDUCER 1
SI02
TRANSDUCER 2
SI03
SHAFT CURR.
SI04
ROTOR E/F
SI01
IN09
MODBUS
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE
UAKBFAULT
X3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OUT 08
U1
X7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DRSDRSCOMPACT2
COMPACT2A
I 10
X4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CAN BUS
X9/X10
RS422/485
MODBUS
POWER SUPPLY
I7
X8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB
Transducer 1
Transducer 2
Shaft Current
Rotor E/F
X2 1 2 3
GND
+ OUT 01
DC
24V...60VDC
110V...220VDC
OUT 02
DC
OUT 04
I4
29
LEGEND:
BATT.
Tx+
TxGND
8
9
10
RS422/485
+5
Rx+
RxGND
Tx+
Tx-
11
12
13
14
15
16
X9
IEC 60870-5-103
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS-COMPACT2A
Fig. 27-2
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
Rotor insulation
Rotor earth fault
Signal transducer
Shaft current
DRS COMPACT2A:
UAKB Rotor insulation
Rotor earth fault
Signal transducer
Shaft current
For the DRS COMPACT2 there are 4 additional module types available which can be included
in the relay scheme whereby a maximum number of 2 modules can be installed in the same device
as shown on the diagram above.
The DRS COMPACT2A is provided with only one additional module which covers all and each
function applications according to software configuration and jumper settings. The output circuitry
of the UAKB is internally standardised wired according to the diagram above.
DID-001-1.02
Page 686 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
For further device specific publications about the products of the DRS-family please refer to the list
below. With the item number you can demand them as PDF or as hardcopy.
28.1 WWW Download page
Everybody has access to the actual version of the documentation:
http://www.sat-automation.com/english/dokumente-drs-e.htm
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
28.2 DRS-MODULAR
DRS-MODULAR Flyer
1000/AK-SE020/0200
Dwg-No.: 4-628.307
Dwg-No.: 3-502.412
DID-001-1.02
Page 688 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
28.3 DRS-COMPACT
DRS-COMPACT2 Flyer
MIC-005-1.01
GIC-000-A.XX/90.00
DIC-006-1.02
DIC-021-1.00
TIC-014-A.XX/10.01
DIC-011-1.XX/40.03
UAKB Description
CIC-012-A.XX/90.00
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
28.4 DRS-LIGHT
MIL-001-1.02
DIL-000-1.01
DIL-001-1.01
DIL-018-1.00
TIL-032--.XX/10.01
DIL-009-1.00
DID-001-1.02
Page 690 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS
28.5 DRS-WIN
SID-401-1.XX/93
DID-001-1.02
Edition: 13/03/2009
DRS_function_library_e.doc
DRS
28.6 Accessoires
Operation cable
DRS-COMPACT2A ---- PC
TID-006--
Operation cable
DRS-LIGHT ------------ PC
incl. RS485-RS232 adapter
GID-014--
Remark:
DRS-LIGHT - Communication interface = RS485
PC - Communication interface = RS232
DID-001-1.02
Page 692 /692
DRS_function_library_e.doc
Edition: 13/03/2009